summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-01-11 01:42:47 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-01-11 01:42:47 +0000
commitc691ebf8ef4f7ccbbc1ca40bb7301836ca70df96 (patch)
tree7898343c587b9dadf0a6616d1a9a78b7f86398f7 /Master
parent309577f1b14a61f0bb2426acea6fa07c41227a95 (diff)
rm geomsty, license nocommercial
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@11840 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/geomsty/manual.bib69
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.pdfbin259746 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.tex1312
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/illustrator.pro872
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/math.pro1752
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/Makefile108
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/PStorus.lab4
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/README75
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/driver.chg59
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/dvips.chg59
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/geomfix156
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geom.sty597
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar10.sty142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar11.sty130
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar12.sty132
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomart.sty193
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk10.sty157
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk11.sty152
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk12.sty157
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombook.sty249
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomenv.sty189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomeqns.sty49
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfig.sty168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfnt.sty135
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomindx.sty72
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geompsfi.sty632
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds1
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc1
-rw-r--r--Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/geomsty.tlpsrc2
29 files changed, 1 insertions, 7623 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/geomsty/manual.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/geomsty/manual.bib
deleted file mode 100644
index 21c2034ad38..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/geomsty/manual.bib
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-@book{Lamport,
- author="Leslie Lamport",
- title="\LaTeX: {A} Document Preparation System",
- publisher="Addison-Wesley",
- address="Reading, MA",
- year = "1986"
-}
-
-@unpublished{amslatex,
- author="{American Mathematical Society}",
- title="\amslatex/ Version 1.1 User's Guide (1991)",
- address="Providence",
- note="Distributed with the software
- (use anonymous ftp from {\tt e-math.ams.com})"
-}
-
-@unpublished{psfig,
- author="Trevor Darrell",
- title="{Psfig/\TeX} 1.8 Users Guide (1991)",
- address="Boston",
- note="Distributed with the software
- (use anonymous ftp from {\tt whitechapel.media.mit.edu})"
-}
-
-@book{epstein:WordProcessing,
- author="David B. A. Epstein and
- Jim Cannon and Silvio Levy and Derek Holt and Mike Paterson and
- William Thurston",
- title="Word Processing in Groups",
- address="Boston",
- year="1992",
- publisher="Jones and Bartlett"
-}
-
-@article{Mittelbach,
- author="Frank Mittelbach",
- title="An environment for multi-column output",
- journal="TUGboat",
- year="1989",
- volume="10",
- pages="407--415"
-}
-
-
-@unpublished{rokicki,
- author="Tom Rokicki",
- title="{DVIPS}: A {\TeX} driver (version 5.490, 1992)",
- address="Stanford",
- note="Distributed with the software
- (use anonymous ftp from {\tt labrea.stanford.edu})"
-}
-
-
-@book{illustrator,
- author="Mike Schuster and others",
- title="Adobe Illustrator",
- address="Palo Alto, CA",
- publisher="Adobe Systems",
- year="1988"
-}
-
-@book{wolfram,
- author="Stephen Wolfram",
- title="Mathematica: A System for Doing Mathematics by Computer",
- address="Reading, MA",
- publisher="Addison-Wesley",
- edition="2nd",
- year="1991"
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index a3e6a16cf6f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index ac12384efe1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/geomsty/manual.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1312 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /usr/home/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/manual.tex,v 1.12 95/07/03 15:57:22 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-\documentstyle[11pt,geom]{article}
-
-\def\leftfoot{\RCSstring$Revision: 1.12 $}
-\def\rightfoot{\RCSstring$Date: 95/07/03 15:57:22 $}
-\def\RCSstring$#1 ${#1}
-
-\addtolength{\textwidth}{.5in}
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-.25in}
-\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-.25in}
-\def\AmS{{\the\textfont2 A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
-\def\amstex/{\AmS-\TeX}
-\def\amslatex/{\AmS-\LaTeX{}}
-\def\latex/{\LaTeX{}}
-
-\makeatletter
-\def\@verbatim{\par\small\trivlist \item[]\if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
-\leftskip\@totalleftmargin\advance\leftskip 1em \rightskip\z@
-\parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
-\@tempswafalse \def\par{\if@tempswa\hbox{}\fi\@tempswatrue\@@par}
-\obeylines \tt \catcode``=13 \@noligs \let\do\@makeother \dospecials}
-\makeatother
-
-\newenvironment{wizard}{\medbreak\begin{small}
- \leavevmode\llap{\hbox to \parindent{$*$\hfil}}}{\par\end{small}\medbreak}
-\def\preref#1{{\normalshape#1}}
-\newtheorem[{\par\large}{\it}]{theorem}{Theorem}[section]
-\equationwith{theorem}
-\newtheorem[{\par\large}{}]{warning}{Warning}
-\def\thewarning{\unskip}
-\def\picpath{}
-
-\makeatletter
-\ifx\fmtname\format@e
-\DeclareSymbolFont{AMSa}{U}{msa}{m}{n}
-\DeclareMathSymbol\square {\mathord}{AMSa}{"03}
-\fi
-\makeatother
-
-\makeindex
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{The {\tt geom} style for \latex/}
-\author{Silvio Levy\\Geometry Center\\
-University of Minnesota}
-\date{Revised for \latex/2$_\epsilon$, July 1995}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\tableofcontents
-%\listoffigures
-
-\vfil
-
-\copyright 1992 Silvio Levy. The software described in this document
-is available free of charge through the Geometry Center at the
-University of Minnesota. It is distributed without any warranty,
-express or implied.
-
-Bug reports and comments about the software and documentation
-can be sent to {\tt levy@geom.umn.edu}. I will take them into
-consideration in future releases, but there is no
-guarantee that particular bugs will be fixed.
-
-\vfil\eject
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-This document describes a \latex/ style called \ix{{\tt geom}},
-which is loosely based on Lamport's \verb+book+
-and \verb+article+ styles \cite{Lamport},
-but provides a number of additional features, such as:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
-inclusion of \ix{PostScript} figures in the document,
-and of \TeX\ text within figures;
-\item
-automatic creation of index entries and cross-reference
-labels where appropriate;
-\item
-no restriction on the use of macros and special characters in
-titles, cross-references, captions, etc.;
-\item
-greater versatility in defining theorem-like environments;
-\item
-upright digits in an italics environment (optionally); and
-\item
-proofing aids such as version numbers and a running index.
-\end{itemize}
-There are also purely esthetic differences,
-many of which can be controlled by the user.
-
-This style had its inception in a set of \latex/ macros
-\ixinv{historical notes}%
-\ixinv{acknowledgements}%
-written for the formatting of \ix{Bill Thurston}'s \ix{{\it
-Three-Dimensional Geometry and Topology}}, first by \ix{Yair Minsky}
-and subsequently by me. After three years of gestation, the macros
-started being used intensively by some other people---notably Thurston,
-\ix{David Epstein} and a number of students at \ix{Warwick
-University}---and more modifications, including a complete rewrite,
-were made. The first book published using the \verb+geom+ style
-\cite{Epstein:WordProcessing} came out in February 1992.
-
-The Appendix to this document describes \verb+mathfig+, a system for
-typesetting \TeX\ labels in Mathematica figures. (Mathematica is
-described in \cite{wolfram}). This system can also be used
-independently of \verb+geom+.
-
-This release owes much to the patience of these first users and the
-feedback they provided, for which I am very grateful. Naturally, my
-debt to the people on whose work I've built---\ix{Don Knuth},
-\ix{Leslie Lamport}, \ix{Rainer Sch\"opf}, \ix{Frank Mittelbach},
-\ix{Trevor Darrell} and others---is impossible to quantify. I wish to
-take this opportunity to thank them, and also John Rawnsley, who
-provided the port to \latex/2$_\epsilon$. I also thank Al Marden, the
-Founding Director of the Geometry Center, for creating the conditions
-needed for this work to happen.
-
-\section{Overall Organization}
-
-In order to use this style, you need to be running a version of
-\latex/ that supports the so-called \ix{new font selection
-scheme} (NFSS), due to Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf.
-If your version of \latex/ is \latex/2$_\epsilon$, you are
-automatically using NFSS. If your version is \latex/2.09, you must
-check whether it supports NFSS. Start \latex/ and type
-\verb+\show\selectfont+. If the response includes
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-> \selectfont=undefined.
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-this is the wrong \latex/. Don't despair yet;
-the right \latex/ may be available at your
-site, but under a different name---try \verb+amslatex+,
-or ask your local guru. (Strictly speaking, \amslatex/
-\cite{amslatex} is a set of \latex/ style files that emulate \amstex/.
-Since their use requires NFSS and the
-necessary modifications used to be supplied with the \amslatex/ style files,
-the name is sometimes used for \latex/+NFSS.) If you can't find
-\latex/+NFSS at all, see further instructions in \Fullref{Installation}.
-
-Unlike most other \latex/ styles, \verb+geom+ comes in several
-files, devoted to different capabilities such as cross-referencing,
-figures, indexing and so on.
-The files currently in the distribution are:
-$$\hbox to \hsize{\small
-\valign{&\hbox{\strut #}\cr
-{\tt dvips.chg}&
-{\tt geom.sty}&
-{\tt geomar10.sty}&
-{\tt geomar11.sty}&
-{\tt geomar12.sty}&
-{\tt geomart.sty}&
-{\tt geombk10.sty}&
-{\tt geombk11.sty}&
-{\tt geombk12.sty}\cr
-\noalign{\hfil}
-%
-driver dependencies&
-master file&
-changes to \verb+art10.sty+&
-changes to \verb+art11.sty+&
-changes to \verb+art12.sty+&
-changes to \verb+article.sty+&
-changes to \verb+book10.sty+&
-changes to \verb+book11.sty+&
-changes to \verb+book12.sty+\cr
-\noalign{\hfil}
-%
-{\tt geombook.sty}&
-{\tt geomenv.sty}&
-{\tt geomeqns.sty}&
-{\tt geomfig.sty}&
-{\tt geomfnt.sty}&
-{\tt geomindx.sty}&
-{\tt geompsfi.sty}&
-{\tt multicol.doc}&
-{\tt multicol.sty}\cr
-\noalign{\hfil}
-%
-changes to \verb+book.sty+&
-environments&
-option file&
-high-level figure support&
-fonts and special symbols&
-index and glossary&
-PostScript figure support&
-source for \verb+multicol.sty+&
-two-column formatting\cr
-}}$$
-
-The file \verb+geom.sty+ is the master, and it is read in when
-\verb+geom+ is called as an option to a main document style, which can
-be either \verb+book+ or \verb+article+.
-That is, to use the stuff described in this document,
-\ixinv{calling {\tt geom}}%
-your text file should start with a line such as
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentstyle[12pt,geom,...]{book}
-\end{verbatim}
-When \verb+geom.sty+ is loaded in, it guesses what your main style is,
-and reads in some changes to that style, contained in the files
-\verb+geombook.sty+, \verb+geombk12.sty+, and so on.
-
-%Each of the following sections is devoted to one major feature of
-%\verb+geom+. Where appropriate, I discuss the file(s) where the feature
-%is implemented, to allow you to make your own modifications.
-
-The file \verb+multicol.sty+ is part of the package files developed by
-Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf at the University of Mainz.
-It is accompanied by \verb+multicol.doc+, which is a ``source'' file
-with documentation. To obtain more of the excellent software written
-by Mittelbach and Sch\"opf, check the CTAN archives (see the
-Installation section below).
-
-The rest of this document describes the installation of \verb+geom+
-(skip if it's already installed), its major features,
-and how you can take advantage of them and (sometimes) modify them.
-Some material that is either very technical or unlikely to be needed
-except under unusual circumstances is printer in smaller type and
-introduced by an asterisk $*$.
-
-\section{Installation}
-
-You only need to read this section if you are in charge of installing
-\verb+geom+ at your site. Installation is very simple if your \latex/
-supports NFSS and your \TeX-to-PostScript driver is Tom Rokicki's
-\verb+dvips+ \cite{Rokicki}.
-
-To check whether you have \latex/+NFSS, see the
-beginning of \Fullref{Overall Organization}. If you don't,
-it's time to switch over to \latex/2$_\epsilon$.
-Get it by ftp from one of the worldwide CTAN archives
-(currently \verb+pip.shsu.edu+,
-\verb+ftp.uni-stuttgart.de+, and \verb+tex.ac.uk+).
-
-If your driver is not
-\verb+dvips+, you have two choices: either install \verb+dvips+, which
-is almost certainly a good idea (get it by ftp from a CTAN archive); or make a
-copy of the file \verb+dvips.chg+ in this distribution, and modify it
-so it writes the \verb+\special+ commands required by your driver. If
-you adapt \verb+dvips.chg+ for your driver, give the new file a
-different name, and replace with this name all occurrences of
-\verb+dvips.chg+ in the rest of this section. Also, please send me a
-copy of the file, so I can include it in future distributions.
-
-As I was saying before I got sidetracked, installation is simple.
-If you're on a UNIX system, edit the \verb+Makefile+ to make sure the
-pathnames are correct for your site, and run \verb+make install+. If you're
-not on a UNIX system, here are the step-by-step instructions:
-
-Place the files listed in the previous section (all the distribution
-files that end in \verb+.sty+, \verb+.chg+ or \verb+.doc+) in the
-system-wide directory for \TeX\ input files. Create a symbolic link
-\verb+driver.chg+ in this directory, pointing to \verb+dvips.chg+.
-(If your system does not support symbolic links, copy \verb+dvips.chg+
-to \verb+driver.chg+.)
-
-Copy the file \verb+mathlabels.orig+ to \verb+mathlabels+ and edit its
-first line to be the correct pathname of the perl executable on your
-system. (If you don't have \verb|perl| at all, you don't know what
-you're missing---get it as soon as possible.) Decide on a directory
-where you want to install the auxiliary scripts \verb+mathlabels+ and
-\verb+geomfix+ (which are used by \verb+mathfig+), and put copies of
-them there. Copy the file \verb+mathfig.orig+ to \verb+mathfig+ and
-edit the lines at the top to specify the location of the
-\verb+mathlabels+ and \verb+geomfix+ scripts, then copy
-\verb+mathlabels+ to a system-wide directory for executables.
-%On a
-%UNIX system, copy \verb+mathfig.1.orig+ to
-%\verb+mathfig.1+ and edit it to correctly mention the loations of the
-%\verb+mathlabels+ and \verb+geomfix+ scripts, then
-%install the manual page \verb+mathfig.1+ in the appropriate place.
-
-Finally, copy \verb+math.pro+ and \verb+illustrator.pro+ into the
-directory where your \TeX-to-PostScript driver looks for prolog files.
-(This assumes your driver supports the inclusion of prolog files;
-switch to \verb+dvips+ if it doesn't.)
-
-\section{No More Fragile Commands}
-
-In standard \latex/, commands such as \verb+\section+ have {\it moving
-arguments}, that is, arguments that migrate to an auxiliary file {\it
-jobname}\verb+.aux+ to be used later in typesetting the table of
-contents and so on \cite[33--34]{Lamport}.
-In this process, macros in the body of the argument
-are expanded, so that when you type, say,
-\begin{verbatim}
-\section{Annoying \TeX nicalities}
-\end{verbatim}
-what goes into the auxiliary file is something like
-\begin{verbatim}
-\@writefile{toc}{\string\contentsline\space {chapter}{\string\numberline\space
-{1}Annoying T\kern -.1667em\lower .5ex\hbox {E}\kern -.125emXnicalities}{1}}
-\end{verbatim}
-where the second line contains the expansion of the macro \verb+\TeX+.
-
-There are several problems with this. First, the expansion, and
-consequently the line where it occurs in the auxiliary file, can be
-very long, which in some implementations means that \TeX\ cannot
-read the line back in. Secondly, the expansion might not
-make sense, or might do the wrong thing, at the time when it is read in again.
-Even worse, the expansion
-of \verb+\section{\small foo}+, for example, actually
-causes an infinite loop.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-Experienced users of \TeX\ who
-want to know why this happens can try typing the following lines to
-plain \TeX:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\foo{\let\bar\foo}
-\foo %Nothing much happens
-\immediate\write0{\foo} %Disaster strikes
-\end{verbatim}
-The problem is that at the time of the \verb+\write+ no assignment is
-taking place, so the \verb+\foo+ at the end of the expansion is not
-handled as a literal.
-\end{wizard}
-
-Standard \latex/'s solution to these problems is for the user to
-precede ``fragile'' macros with the \verb+\protect+ command
-\cite[33--34]{Lamport}. By contrast, in the \verb+geom+ style,
-you don't have to worry about ``fragile'' commands
-in the following situations:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
-in the arguments of the sectioning commands
-\verb+\chapter+, \verb+\section+, and so on;
-\item
-in the optional argument to the \verb+theorem+
-environment and its relatives (\Fullref{Theorems and Their Friends});
-\item
-in the arguments to \verb+\caption+, \verb+\fig+ and its relatives
-(\Fullref{PostScript Figures});
-\item
-in the arguments to \verb+\markright+ and \verb+\markboth+;
-\item
-in the argument to \verb+\cite+.
-\end{itemize}
-This covers almost all important situations where fragile
-commands need to be \verb+\protect+ed \cite[151]{Lamport}. In future
-versions I hope to extend this permissiveness to the remaining
-situations.
-
-Notice, however, that the \verb+\verb|...|+ construction continues to
-be forbidden inside arguments to most commands. This is due to
-reasons deeply embedded in \TeX\ itself, and is unlikely ever to
-change.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-In some circumstances you might want the old \latex/ behavior of
-macro expansion inside the argument of \verb+\chapter+, say.
-For instance, you might have a locally defined macro whose definition
-will be unknown at the time the table of contents is read.
-In this case you can use the following construction:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\edef\mystring{...} % where ... stands for the argument to be expanded
-\expandafter\chapter\expandafter{\mystring}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{wizard}
-
-\section{Labels and Cross-References}
-
-In standard \latex/, the argument to the \verb+\label+ command cannot
-contain anything but characters (after expansion). In the \verb+geom+
-style, this restriction is lifted, so labels contain just about
-anything. For example, \verb+\label{\TeX}+ and
-\verb+\label{Isometries of $\bold R^2$}+ are acceptable. Macros are
-no longer expanded.
-
-One advantage of this flexibility is that subdivisions can be
-automatically labeled by their titles. In the \verb+geom+ format, by
-default, every sectioning command such as \verb+\section+ generates a
-label with its title. If this feature causes you to run out of
-memory, you can turn it off by saying \verb+\autolabelfalse+ in your
-document's preamble.
-
-To refer to the place where a label occurs, you can still use the
-\verb+\ref+ command, as in standard \latex/. This gives a bald
-number---for example, \verb+\ref{+{\tt Isometries of }\verb+$\bold R^2$}+ will
-print ``8.3'' if Section~8.3 starts with
-\verb+\section{+{\tt Isometries of }\verb+$\bold R^2$}+
-while automatic labeling is in effect.
-
-A new feature is that you can
-replace \verb+\ref+ by \verb+\fullref+ or \verb+\Fullref+, to get
-``section 8.3'' or ``Section 8.3'', respectively.
-The way \verb+\fullref+ works is by storing in a certain register the
-type of environment in which a label was created. Thus, when
-a new section starts, this register gets the value ``section''. When
-a \verb+\begin+ command introducing
-one of the environments described in \Fullref{Theorems and Their Friends} is encountered
-inside this section, the register gets updated to the type of that
-environment, say ``theorem''. It reverts to ``section'' when
-the matching \verb+\end+ command is read.
-
-Even if you have nested
-environments, labels placed in each of them are assigned the correct
-type. Consider the input
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newtheorem[{\par\large}{\it}]{theorem}{Theorem}[section]
-\equationwith{theorem} % These two lines are explained
-... % in later sections
-\begin{theorem}[Erd\"os]
-A theorem both deep and profound / Is that a circle is round:
-\begin{equation}
-\mathrm{curvature}\,S^1=\mathrm {const}.
-\label{circle}
-\end{equation}
-In a paper by Erd\"os / Written in Kurdish / A counterexample is found.
-\label{Kurdish}
-\end{theorem}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-which gives
-%
-\begin{theorem}[Erd\"os]
-A theorem both deep and profound / Is that a circle is round:
-\begin{equation}
-\mathrm{curvature}\,S^1=\mathrm {const}.
-\label{circle}
-\end{equation}
-In a paper by Erd\"os / Written in Kurdish / A counterexample is found.
-\label{Kurdish}
-\end{theorem}
-Now \verb+\Fullref{Erd\"os}+ gives ``\Fullref{Erd\"os}'',
-\verb+\Fullref{circle}+ gives ``\Fullref{circle}'', and
-\verb+\Fullref{Kurdish}+ gives ``\Fullref{Kurdish}''. Furthermore,
-\verb+\ref*{Erd\"os}+ gives ``\ref*{Erd\"os}'', that is, it prints the
-(optional) tag associated with theorems and the like. Of course you
-can also use \verb+\fullref*+ and \verb+\Fullref*+.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-If you disagree with \latex/'s idea of what the label type should be
-at a particular point, you can override is using \verb+\setlabeltype+.
-For example, if we had \verb+\setlabeltype{formula}+ right before the
-\verb+\label+ command in the previous example, the result of
-\verb+\Fullref{circle}+ would be ``Formula~\ref{circle}'' instead of
-``\Fullref{circle}''.
-\end{wizard}
-
-Before \verb+\ref+ actually prints the number of a cross-reference, it
-applies the macro \verb+\preref+ to it. By default, this macro does
-nothing; but you can redefine it to do whatever you want with the
-number. If you want the number to appear upright even if the
-surrounding text is in italics, you can say
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\preref#1{{\normalshape#1}}
-\end{verbatim}
-The output of \verb+\pageref+ and of \verb+\cite+ is also passed to
-\verb+\pageref+ before being printed.
-
-\section{Theorems and Their Friends}
-
-Standard \latex/ provides the \verb+\newtheorem+ command to create
-environments for statements like theorems, lemmas, and so on.
-The basic idea can be adapted for other types of text that should
-stand out, such an exercises, conventions, and so on.
-Not all of these should be treated typographically the same: for
-example, you might want exercises in smaller type.
-
-The \verb+geom+ style extends \latex/'s \verb+\newtheorem+ command
-to allow you to do this easily. Recall from \cite[58]{Lamport} that
-\verb+\newtheorem+ has two required arguments: the name of the new
-environment (say ``theorem''), and the text used to introduce it (say
-``Theorem''). In standard \latex/ it also takes an optional argument,
-whose meaning depends on whether it comes before or after the second
-required argument.
-
-In the \verb+geom+ style, you can use yet another optional argument,
-right after \verb+\newtheorem+, to tell \latex/ how this environment
-differs from a vanilla theorem-like environment. This optional
-argument should consist of two sequences of commands, each surrounded
-by braces, like this:
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newtheorem[{\par\large}{\it}]{theorem}{Theorem}[section]
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-(This is the same definition used for the
-example in \Fullref{Labels and Cross-References}.)
-
-The first sequence of commands in braces, \verb+\par\large+, will be
-executed as soon as \latex/ sees a \verb+\begin{theorem}+. This means
-the theorem will come out in larger type (see the output in
-\Fullref{Labels and Cross-References}). \latex/ implicitly starts a
-new level of braces when it encounters a \verb+\begin+
-command---changes inside the environment are local, so the
-\verb+\large+ will cease to have effect at the end of the environment.
-
-The second sequence of commands is inserted right after the
-introductory text {\bf{\def\preref#1{#1} \Fullref{Erd\"os}} (Erd\"os)}. It affects
-everything from that point till the end of the environment. Here
-we've used \verb+\it+, so the statement of the theorem is printed in
-italics. Note that, unlike the standard \verb+article+ and
-\verb+book+ styles, \verb+geom+ does not italicize theorems by
-default. If we didn't have the \verb+\it+ in the \verb+\newtheorem+
-command, the text of the theorem would be upright.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-You can also control the appearance of the introductory text itself
-by changing the definition of \verb+\theoremintro+, which by default is
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\theoremintro#1{\normalshape\bf#1}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-The argument \verb+#1+ stands for the introductory text.
-\end{wizard}
-
-You need two pairs of braces in the new optional argument to
-\verb+\newtheorem+, even if one is empty. If both are empty,
-the behavior is the same as if the optional argument weren't there.
-
-Another enhancement to \verb+\newtheorem+ in
-the \verb+geom+ style is automatic labeling. Suppose you say
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
-\end{verbatim}
-\newtheorem[{\setlabeltype{def.}}{}]{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
-%
-(recall from \cite[59]{Lamport} that the use of \verb+[theorem]+ causes
-definitions to be numbered in the same sequence as theorems,
-assuming the \verb+theorem+ environment has been previously defined).
-%
-Now saying
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{definition}[universe]
-The universe is a Hubble bubble.
-\end{definition}
-\end{verbatim}
-prints
-\begin{definition}[universe]
-The universe is a Hubble bubble.
-\end{definition}
-%
-and implicitly calls \verb+\label{universe}+. (As
-mentioned in \Fullref{Labels and Cross-References}, you can turn this
-feature off by saying \verb+\autolabelfalse+.) The environment knows
-its type at the time the label is made, so saying
-\verb+\Fullref{universe}+ will print ``Definition~\ref{universe}''.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-The type is usually just the environment name, but it can be
-overridden by including \verb+\setlabeltype+ (\Fullref{Labels and
-Cross-References}) in the first optional argument to
-\verb+\newtheorem+. Thus if the \verb+definition+ environment had
-been created with
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newtheorem[{\setlabeltype{def.}}{}]{definition}[theorem]{Definition}
-\end{verbatim}
-\verb+\Fullref{universe}+ would appear as ``\Fullref{universe}''.
-\end{wizard}
-
-The preferred style of some publishing houses calls for digits and
-punctuation to be typeset upright in theorems and such, amidst
-surrounding text in italics. The control sequence
-\verb+\specialdigits+ achieves this. It causes each digit in text, as
-well as parentheses, commas, colon, semicolons and periods, to
-effectively be preceded by \verb+\normalshape+. You can use
-\verb+\specialdigits+ after \verb+\it+ in the definition of a new
-environment with \verb+\newtheorem+.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-The way \verb+\specialdigits+ works is by making digits and
-punctuation into active characters (changing their \verb+\catcode+s to
-13). This has two consequences. First, characters that arise from
-macro expansion don't get the special treatment, because their
-\verb+\catcode+s are frozen beforehand; this is true, in particular,
-of the expansion of \verb+\ref+ commands (but see the end of
-\Fullref{Labels and Cross-References}).
-
-The second consequence is that the digits and decimal point no longer
-work in specifying dimensions: if you write \verb+\vskip 1in+ while
-\verb+\specialdigits+ is in effect, you get an error message
-complaining that a number was expected. To get around this, you can
-temporarily cancel the specialness with \verb+\regulardigits+. If you
-run into this problem more than once or twice, it's best to create a
-macro, outside the scope of \verb+\specialdigits+, that expands to the
-desired command (\verb+\def\inch{\vskip 1in}+).
-\end{wizard}
-
-\section{The Proof Environment}
-
-Theorems and proofs go hand in hand.
-The \verb+proof+ environment in \verb+geom+, in its most basic form,
-prints {\it Proof.} at the beginning of the proof, and an end-of-proof
-symbol $\square$ at the end. With an optional argument it behaves
-like this:
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{proof}[Poincar\'e conjecture]
-Notice first that ...
-... as we wished to show.
-\end{proof}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-\begin{proof}[Poincar\'e conjecture]
-Notice first that \dots\ as we wished to show.
-\end{proof}
-
-\begin{wizard}
-The formatting of the proof's introductory text is controlled by
-the macro \verb+\proofintro+, whose single argument is the optional
-argument to \verb+\begin{proof}+---in this case, ``Poincar\'e
-conjecture''. If the optional argument is not used,
-\verb+\proofintro+ is passed an empty argument.
-The default setting of \verb+\proofintro+ is
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\proofintro#1{\def\@tempa{#1}%
- {\it Proof\ifx\@tempa\empty\else\ of #1\fi. }\ignorespaces}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-You can probably figure out how it decides whether to write
-{\it Proof} or {\it Proof of\dots}. You can change its definition to
-obtain other effects.
-
-Likewise, the formatting of the box at the end of the proof is
-controlled by the macro \verb+\provedboxcontents+, which is entirely
-analogous. Its standard setting is
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\provedboxcontents#1{\def\@tempa{#1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty$\square$\else\fbox{\small#1}\fi}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{wizard}
-
-To identify your proofs with the number of their corresponding
-theorems, lemmas, corollaries, etc., use \verb+\setprooftag+ in the
-definition of these environments. For instance, after you say
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newtheorem[{\setprooftag}{\it}]{theorem}{Theorem}[section]
-\newtheorem[{\setprooftag}{\it}]{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-\verb+\begin{proof}+ will behave as if you were passing it as
-its optional argument the number of the most recent theorem or corollary.
-Nested proofs keep track of their arguments correctly, so the box at
-the end of each gets the same tag as the {\it Proof of\dots} at the
-beginning.
-
-However, certain situations are too confusing for \verb+\setprooftag+.
-For example, if you state a corollary between a theorem and its proof,
-the proof will incorrectly get the corollary's number, which is more
-recent. In this situation you have to use the optional argument. Of
-course, it's best to use \verb+\ref{...}+ as the argument, rather than
-an explicit number, which might change later.
-
-If a proof
-ends with a displayed formula, it is recommented that the proved box
-be placed next to the formula (as if it were a tag). This is done
-by inserting \verb+\proved+ before the closing \verb+$$+.
-Likewise, if the last line of the proof is part of an \verb+\item+,
-you can use \verb+\proved+ before the closing \verb+\end{enumerate}+
-(or whatever) so the proved box won't be set on a line by itself.
-In even more difficult
-cases---for instance, a formula that already has a tag, or is part of a
-multi-line display---plop \verb+\box\provedbox+ where you want the box to be.
-
-\section{Equations}
-
-The \verb+geom+ style reinstates the plain \TeX\ macro
-\verb+\eqalign+, which is not part of standard \latex/ but is
-nonetheless very useful. Unlike the \verb+eqnarray+ environment,
-\verb+\eqalign+ creates math alignments that are not treated as whole
-lines, and so can be combined with other elements.
-
-The example in \Fullref{Labels and Cross-References} has
-\verb+\equationwith{theorem}+ after the \verb+theorem+
-environment is created.
-This causes equations made with the \verb+equation+ and
-the \verb+eqnarray+ environments to be numbered in the same sequence
-as theorems. You can replace \verb+theorem+ with any environment that
-was defined with \verb+\newtheorem+ and that has a counter with its name
-(the environment has a counter with its name if
-there was no optional argument between
-the first and second required arguments to \verb+\newtheorem+).
-
-If you load the optional style \verb+geomeqns+---that is,
-if your document starts with
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentstyle[geom,geomeqns,...
-\end{verbatim}
-the tags in the \verb+equation+ and the \verb+eqnarray+ environments
-are printed on the left, in boldface. This makes them visually
-similar to the tags that introduce theorems, so it is generally
-appropriate to use this style if you're numbering equations and
-theorems in the same sequence.
-
-\section{The {\mediumseries \tt Figure} and {\mediumseries \tt Table} environments}
-
-The \verb+geom+ style supports the \verb+figure+ and \verb+table+
-environments of standard \latex/, and, as mentioned above, if you use
-the \verb+\caption+ command you don't have to worry about fragile
-macros inside its argument. However, I recommend that you use
-instead the new \verb+Figure+ and \verb+Table+ environments, which
-provide some bells and whistles.
-
-These environments take three arguments: a cross-reference label, a title and
-a legend (or explanatory caption). The command
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{Figure}{torus}{The square torus}
-{A torus can be obtained, topologically,
-by gluing together parallel sides of a square.}
-$$
-\begin{picture}(1,1)
-... % lots of \put commands
-\end{picture}
-$$
-\end{Figure}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-prints
-%
-\begin{Figure}{torus}{The square torus}
-{A torus can be obtained, topologically,
-by gluing together parallel sides of a square.}
-$$
-\unitlength=1in
-\begin{picture}(1,1)
-\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){1}}
-\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){1}}
-\put(1,0){\vector(0,1){1}}
-\put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
-\end{picture}
-$$
-\end{Figure}
-%
-
-\noindent
-and in addition it creates a cross-reference label \verb+torus+ and an
-entry in the table of contents with the text ``The square torus''.
-As you can see,
-the figure number and the title appear in
-boldface, the legend in a lighter face. In proofing mode
-(\Fullref{Proofing Aids}), the file
-name also appears under the figure, in tiny letters. If you don't
-want a legend, just write \verb+{}+ after the first two arguments.
-(In other words, the legend is {\it not} an optional argument---it is
-simply an argument that sometimes happens to be empty.)
-There is an optional argument to the \verb+\Figure+ environment, consisting
-of a subset of the letters \verb+htbp+ and indicating a location
-where the figure may be placed \cite[176]{Lamport}; it should come
-before all other arguments.
-All of this applies to the \verb+Table+ environment as well.
-
-\section{PostScript Figures}
-
-Most often your picture won't be made with \latex/ commands; it will
-exist in a separate PostScript file. Inclusion of PostScript figures
-is still a bit of a bugaboo for many \TeX\ users, in spite of the
-existence for many years now of Trevor Darrell's excellent macro
-package \ix{Psfig/\TeX} \cite{psfig} and others.
-
-The \verb+geom+ style automatically loads the file
-\verb+geompsfi.sty+, a modified version of \ix{Psfig/\TeX}
-(incorporating some improvements by \ix{Stephan Bechtols\-heim} and
-others of my own). It allows you to include PostScript figures very
-simply:
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\fig{PStorus}{The square torus}{A torus can be obtained, topologically,
-by gluing together parallel sides of a square.}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-\fig{PStorus}{The square torus}{A torus can be obtained, topologically,
-by gluing together parallel sides of a square.}
-
-The \verb+\fig+ macro takes the same three arguments (plus an optional
-one) as the \verb+Figure+ environment. But the first argument, in
-addition to being used to make a label, is also the name of the file
-where the PostScript figure is stored (minus the \verb+.ps+ suffix).
-Thus \Fullref{PStorus} is stored in the file \verb+PStorus.ps+.
-
-To get two or three figures side by side, sharing the same caption,
-use \verb+\doublefig+ or \verb+\triplefig+. The PostScript file names
-for \verb+\doublefig{foo}...+ would be in this case would be
-\verb+foo-1.ps+ and \verb+foo-2.ps+, and likewise for
-\verb+\triplefig+. There is no similar mechanism for more than three
-figures.
-
-The directory where the figures are to be found is governed by the
-macro \verb+\picpath+. For example, if the directory is
-called \verb+/u/levy/pictures+, you should say
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\picpath{/u/levy/pictures/}
-\end{verbatim}
-at the beginning of your document. (You need the \verb+/+ at the end.)
-
-\begin{wizard}
-You can also use a relative pathname, such as \verb+pictures/+, or even
-the empty string (or \verb+./+) for the current directory.
-However, the program that sends
-your \verb+.dvi+ file to the printer may not find the pictures since
-it is likely to be invoked from a different directory.
-
-If a pathname includes characters that are special to \TeX, you need
-to make then unspecial in order to define \verb+\picpath+. Here is an
-example:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begingroup % start a group so the change in _ is local
-\catcode`\_=12 % make _ behave like an ordinary character
-\gdef\picpath{/home/tampa_a/fac/wpt/pictures/} % this def is global
-\endgroup % now _ reverts to its usual meaning
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{wizard}
-
-If you have a long document with lots of pictures, it is better to
-organize them into sections and chapters. In that case you should
-leave \verb+\picpath+ unset, and set the macro \verb+\masterpicpath+
-to the master picture directory. If I were using this scheme in this
-document, I might say
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\masterpicpath{/home/levy/pictures/}
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-and put \Fullref{torus} in file
-\verb+/home/levy/pictures/+{\tt\ref{PostScript Figures}}\verb+/PStorus.ps+.
-(With the \verb+book+ style, which has chapters, I would need
-\verb+chap3/+{\tt\ref{PostScript Figures}}
-instead of just {\tt\ref{PostScript Figures}}.)
-
-The way \verb+\fig+ works is by calling
-the command \verb+\psfig+ \cite{psfig}, which creates a \TeX\ \verb+\vbox+
-of the right size and containing instructions for the figure to be
-included at the time of printing. You normally won't use
-\verb+\psfig+ directly, since \verb+\fig+ calls it automaticaly.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-However, occasionally you many want to use \verb|\psfig| directly to
-take advantage of this macro's many options, such as resizing. See
-the Psfig/\TeX\ manual \cite{psfig} for details; but some of the newer
-options to Psfig/\TeX\ are not supported here.
-\end{wizard}
-
-In order for the \verb+\psfig+ command to know what size box to make,
-it needs to find your PostScript figure file, and
-the file must have near the top a line like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
-%%BoundingBox: 0 30 98 128
-\end{verbatim}
-The first two numbers represent the low $x$- and $y$-coordinates of
-the figure's bounding box, in points, and the last two represent
-the high $x$- and $y$-coordinates. In the example just given, which
-corresponds to \Fullref{PStorus}, the bounding box goes from $0$ to
-$98$~pt in the $x$-direction and from $30$ to $128$~pt in the
-$y$-direction, so its height and width are both $98$~pt, or
-approximately 1.35~inches. The corners of the bounding box appear on
-the page in proof mode (\Fullref{Proofing Aids}).
-
-Note that \verb+\psfig+ only cares about the height and the width of
-the bounding box, not about the actual values of the high and low
-coordinates. The latter are relevant only in reference to the
-coordinates of the objects inside the picture, about which
-\verb+\psfig+ knows nothing. (Thus the bottom left corner of the
-square in \Fullref{PStorus} has coordinates $(4,34)$, which is a
-little bit above and to the right of the bounding box's bottom left
-corner $(0,30)$.) If one added the same number to the $x$-coordinates
-of the bounding box and of every object in the picture, the result
-would be exactly the same.
-
-Normally, the \verb+%%BoundingBox+ line should have been placed in the
-PostScript file automatically, by whatever program you used to create
-the figure. If the program did not write a line like that, you have
-to do it by hand, and you should consider switching to another program.
-
-Notice that the labels $a$ and $b$ in \Fullref{PStorus} appear in
-the same font as they would in the text. In fact the labels were
-typeset by \TeX\ itself, and do not come from the PostScript file,
-where it would be hard to specify them satisfactorily---especially
-details such as the placement of the primes and other subscripts and
-superscripts. The information for these labels is contained in a file
-with the suffix \verb+.lab+, which normally is generated by the same
-program that creates the PostScript file, or by a postprocessor.
-If you want to include {\it Mathematica} graphics, for example, you
-should use the \verb+mathfig+ utility, described in the Appendix.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-The average user has no need to know what the \verb~.lab~ file looks
-like, but if you want to write a new postprocessor in order to
-implement this labeling scheme in conjunction with your favorite
-drawing program, here are the details. Each line of the file
-yields one label, and contains the \verb+\setlabel+ command
-followed by five arguments: the text of the label, to be typeset in
-math mode; the $x$- and $y$-coordinates of the label's {\it reference
-point}, in points; and the {\it relative} $x$- and $y$-coordinates of
-the reference point. A value of 1 for the last two arguments means
-the reference point of the label it at the top or right of the label's
-bounding box; a value of $-1$ means bottom or left, a value of $0$
-means middle, and so on.
-
-For example, here is the file \verb+PStorus.lab+ corresponding to
-\Fullref{PStorus}:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setlabel{a}{48.600000}{34.162104}{0}{1}
-\setlabel{b}{4.162104}{78.600000}{1}{0}
-\setlabel{a'}{48.600000}{123.037896}{0}{-1}
-\setlabel{b'}{93.037896}{78.600000}{-1}{0}
-\end{verbatim}
-For the label $a$, the reference point is at the top middle of the
-label's bounding box, so the label itself will be centered under the
-point with coordinates $(48.6,34.1)$.
-
-If you want to typeset a label outside math mode, use \latex/'s
-\verb+\mbox+ command (or \TeX's \verb+\hbox+). The font used by
-default in this case is the same as for captions. Thus, to get the
-label {\sf foo} you'll probably want to type the string
-\verb+\hbox{foo}+ into your figure-making program.
-
-Sometimes the fact that the source \verb+\hbox{foo}+ has many more
-characters than the output causes problems---for example, the
-figure-making program might leave too much space for the label. The
-macro \verb+\hyperactivelabels+ provides a way around this. This
-macro is called every time a label is about to be typeset, and you can
-define it at will, to allow abbreviations, say. Thus, after the
-commands
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\hyperactivelabels{\mathcode`:="8000}
-\def\activecolon#1:{\hbox{#1}}
-{\catcode`\:=\active\global\let:=\activecolon}
-\end{verbatim}
-the construction \verb+:foo:+ has exactly the same effect as
-\verb+\hbox{foo}+---but only inside labels. (The command
-\verb+\mathcode`:="8000+ causes the colon to be treated as an active
-character in math mode; the next two lines say, in a roundabout way,
-what this active character should do.)
-\end{wizard}
-
-Utilities (programs) that generate PostScript graphics files generally
-start the file with a ``signature'' (a comment line stating the
-utility's name and version) and a chunk of PostScript code---call it a
-header---establishing abbreviations, subroutines, fonts and the like.
-The header is always the same, so if you have dozens of figures
-generated by the same utility it's good to factor out this
-commonality, if possible. With certain utilities, you can save your
-files without the header. Then they won't print on their own; but
-when \verb+\psfig+ looks into them, if it can recognize the utility's
-signature, it puts into the dvi file a command that causes the
-inclusion of the header at printing time. This way the header is
-included only once for all figures, saving memory and time. The
-utilities that \verb+\psfig+ currently knows about are Mathematica
-\cite{wolfram} and Adobe Illustrator \cite{illustrator}. With
-Illustrator, saving without the header is accomplished by clicking on
-the appropriate entry in the ``Save As'' dialog box. For Mathematica,
-see the Appendix.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-For the signature to be seen by \verb+\psfig+, it must appear near the
-top of the file; the actual number of lines that \verb+\psfig+ scans
-is controlled by the counter \verb+\maxheaderlines+. The
-\verb+%%BoundingBox+ line must also lie in that same initial stretch.
-The default value of \verb+\maxheaderlines+ is 100, which is almost
-always adequate.
-\end{wizard}
-
-\section{Fonts}
-As mentioned in \Fullref{Overall Organization}, the \verb+geom+ style
-requires NFSS,
-a rational font management system that makes the use of new
-fonts easier than under old \latex/.
-
-Under this scheme, unlike the old, if you say \verb+\bf... \small...+,
-the \verb+\small+ has no effect on the boldness of the current
-font---size, boldness, style and so on are independent attributes.
-This is generally good, but it does create backward incompatibilities.
-For example, if you have an old \latex/ document where you've relied
-on \verb+\small+ to reset the weight of the font, you're in for a
-surprise. Also, \verb+\rm+ should generally be replaced by
-\verb+\normalshape+. For a list of all such differences, see
-\cite{amslatex}.
-
-Another case of conflicting ideas on what font-change commands should
-do is inside math mode. Under NFSS,
-\verb+\bf+ has no effect inside math mode---you need to say
-\verb+$\mathbf{xyz}$+, for example. The \verb+geom+ style will
-print a warning on your terminal if it sees \verb|\bf| in math mode.
-
-In addition to the math-mode commands \verb+\mathbf+, \verb+\mathrm+ and
-\verb+\mathit+, the \verb+geom+ style defines \verb+\mathss+ and
-\verb+\mathtt+ as the math mode counterparts of \verb+\sf+ (sans-serif)
-and \verb+\tt+ (typewriter type).
-
-Support for Fraktur (``gothic'') and blackboard-bold fonts is
-provided, as well as for the fonts \verb+msam+ and \verb+msbm+, which
-contain a plethora of mathematical symbols. This is all thanks to the
-AMS, and you should turn to the \amslatex/ distribution
-\cite{amslatex} if your site lacks the fonts themselves or the
-prerequisite auxiliary files \verb+amsfonts.sty+ and
-\verb+amssymb.sty+.
-
-\section{The Index, the Table of Contents and the Glossary}
-
-The basic command for putting something into the index is
-\verb+\index+, as in standard \latex/. But \verb+\index+ does not
-print its argument. To index a word that actually appears in the text
-say \verb+\ix{...}+. To index mathematical notation say
-\verb+\ixn$...$+ or \verb+\ixninv$...$+, depending on whether the
-contents should appear or not. And, just for symmetry, you can also
-use \verb+\ixinv+, which equals \verb+\index+:
-$$
-\vbox{\halign to .7\hsize{\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil
-#\hfil &&{\tt \char`\\ #}\hfil\cr
-&\omit Text&\omit Notation\cr
-\noalign{\medskip}
-Visible&ix&ixn\cr
-Invisible&ixinv&ixninv\cr}}
-$$
-
-An index entry is made automatically for any \verb+\label+ or
-\verb+\ref+ command. In the second case the entry goes into the index
-file preceded by a \verb+%+.
-
-Remember that, unless you have issued the
-command \verb|\autolabelfalse|, there are lots of situations in which
-a label, and consequently an index entry, is generated automatically:
-in particular, this happens for each sectioning command
-(\Fullref{Labels and Cross-References}) and for each tagged
-theorem, lemma, and so on (\Fullref{Theorems and Their Friends}).
-This provides a
-wealth of index entries, which later you can winnow out
-semi-automatically, if necessary, since entries of this sort appear in
-quotation marks, preceded by their type. You can see all the entries
-that a given page contributes to the index by looking at the small
-print on the top left of the page when proofing mode is on
-(\Fullref{Proofing Aids}).
-
-\begin{wizard}
-The \verb+geom+ style modifies the \verb+\theindex+ format of standard
-\latex/ so that the index is printed in smaller type. Moreover, it
-achieves a double-column format not by using standard \latex/'s
-\verb+\twocolumn+ command, which starts a new page, but rather
-\ix{Frank Mittelbach}'s \verb+multicols+ environment \cite{Mittelbach},
-which is implemented in the file \verb+multicol.sty+. Using this
-environment you can have single-column and double-column text on the
-same page. If you want to add an explanation before the index, for
-example, you might say something like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{theindex}
-\null % this avoids what seems to be a bug in multicol.sty
-\end{multicols} % end double column format started by \begin{theindex}
-
-Numbers in parentheses refer to pages where the entry should be
-discussed but isn't, due to laziness on the author's part.
-
-\begin{multicols}2 % restart double column format
-\item aardvark...
-\end{theindex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{wizard}
-
-Support for a glossary is somewhat more extensive than in standard
-\latex/. You can mark a word as a glossary entry by saying
-\verb+\glo{...}+; this causes a \glo{dagger} to be placed before the
-word, and an index entry for the word to be generated in the file {\it
-jobname}\verb+.idx+, preceded by \verb+\dag+.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-Note that the
-\verb+geom+ style does not use a separate {\it jobname}\verb+.glo+
-file; although standard \latex/'s \verb+\glossary+ command is still
-available if you insist in writing entries to that file, this command
-has not been made robust in the way that \verb+\index+ and \verb+\label+
-have. (See \Fullref{No More Fragile Commands}.)
-\end{wizard}
-
-The glossary itself is
-delimited by \verb+\begin{theglossary}+ and \verb+\end{theglossary}+.
-Glossary entries start like this:
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-\entry{doohickey} ...
-\entry[\cite{...}]{thingamajig} ...
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-The entry name is printed in boldface, followed by a period.
-The contents of the optional argument are printed immediately after
-the entry name, before the period. The comments made above about
-double-column formatting apply to the glossary as well.
-
-The table of contents is treated in much the same way as in standard
-\latex/, but there is one important difference: starred sectioning
-commands, like \verb+\section*+, do show up in the table of contents,
-unless you've said \verb+\starredcontentsfalse+.
-Since one generally doesn't want the table of contents
-to include an entry for the table of contents itself,
-the definition of \verb+\tableofcontents+ in
-\verb+geomart.sty+ starts like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\tableofcontents{{\starredcontentsfalse\section*{Contents}...}}
-\end{verbatim}
-The extra pair of braces limits the action of
-\verb+\starredcontentsfalse+ to this entry only.
-
-\section{Proofing Aids}
-
-The \verb+geom+ style provides a number of proofing aids that you can
-turn on and off by saying \verb+\proofingtrue+ and
-\verb+\proofingfalse+. The default is for proofing to be on. These
-facilities are independent of standard \latex/'s \verb+draft+ option
-to the \verb+book+ and \verb+article+ style, whose only effect is to
-make overfull box markers visible.
-
-If you use \latex/'s \verb+\includeonly+ mechanism \cite[76]{Lamport},
-you can print your final version by passing the macro
-\verb+\noproofing+ as the argument to \verb+\includeonly+. This not
-only turns off all proofing aids, but also prevents \latex/ from
-starting a new page for each input file. (Naturally, the page breaks
-will likely be different because of that, so you'll need to run the
-job twice to get cross-references right.)
-
-\begin{wizard}
-Normally you have two lines like this in the main file for your
-document:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\typein[\sectionstoinclude]{Enter the sections that should be processed: }
-\includeonly{\sectionstoinclude}
-\end{verbatim}
-so you can type in the sections to be included from the terminal,
-without having to modify the source file. The macro
-\verb+\noproofing+ works in this mode, too.
-\end{wizard}
-
-By the way, if you are using the \verb+book+ style, the construction
-\verb+\chap1{345}+ expands to
-\begin{verbatim}
-chap1/1.3,chap1/1.4,chap1/1.5
-\end{verbatim}
-This has nothing to do with proofing, but it provides a useful shorthand
-for use with \verb+\includeonly+.
-Braces should be used around a section or chapter number having more
-than one digit.
-
-In proofing mode you get, to the left of the main text, a column in
-tiny print with all the index entries contributed by that page. This
-includes automatic entries with their respective prefixes (see
-\Fullref{The Index, the Table of Contents and the Glossary}).
-
-If you are in proof mode and the macros \verb+\leftfoot+ and
-\verb+\rightfoot+ are defined, they will be typeset flush left and
-flush right on the footline. These macros are often defined to
-contain information about draft version, date of last modification,
-etc., which can be updated automatically.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-Near the top of the
-source file for this document, I wrote the lines
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\leftfoot{\RCSstring$Revision: 1.12 $}
-\def\rightfoot{\RCSstring$Date: 95/07/03 15:57:22 $}
-\def\RCSstring$#1 ${#1}
-\end{verbatim}
-The first two lines are automatically updated by the UNIX utility
-\ix{RCS} (Revision Control System) whenever I check the file in or
-out. RCS requires that the keywords \verb+Revision+, \verb+Date+ and
-so on be found within dollar signs, and it tacks on a blank before the
-closing \verb+$+ for good measure. The \verb+\RCSstring+ macro
-eliminates this extraneous stuff.
-\end{wizard}
-
-\section*{Appendix: {\mediumseries \tt mathfig}---A System for Doing Typesetting in
-Mathematica}
-
-\begin{warning}
-The software described in this Appendix depends on Mathematica
-\cite{wolfram}. I make no representation whatsoever concerning its
-performance. Although I have used \verb+mathfig+ under Mathematica
-versions 1.2, 2.0 and 2.1, I emphasize that \verb+mathfig+ may fail to
-work as described here and that I take no responsibility for such
-failure.
-\end{warning}
-
-The \verb+mathfig+ program, for use on UNIX systems, takes a
-Mathematica source file \verb+foo.m+ and calls Mathematica to create
-a PostScript file \verb+foo.ps+.
-Then \verb+mathfig+ postprocesses \verb+foo.ps+ to
-take out the PostScript labels putting the same information in a file
-\verb+foo.lab+ that can be read later by \latex/, as explained in
-\Fullref{PostScript Figures}. The usage of this program is the following:
-$$
-\hbox to \hsize{\small\hskip 1em
-{\tt mathfig} [ {\tt -d} {\it directory} ] [ {\tt -i} {\it initfile} ]
-{\it files}\hfil}
-$$
-The \verb+-d+ option makes all file names relative to the specified
-directory. The \verb+-i+ option tells Mathematica to read an
-initialization file. Any number of files can be passed as subsequent
-argument; \verb+\mathfig+ processes one at a time, starting a new
-Mathematica session each time.
-
-The steps performed by \verb+mathfig+ when processing the file
-\verb+foo.m+ are the following. It calls \verb+math+ and gives it the
-commands \verb+Get["+{\it initfile}\verb+"]+ (if an initialization
-file was specified) and \verb+Get["foo.m"]+. The result of
-\verb+Get["foo.m"]+ should be an expression with head \verb+Graphics+
-or \verb+Graphics3D+. This expression is passed to \verb+Display+,
-with output sent to the filter \verb+geomfix+; this filter is
-analogous to the \verb+psfix+ program supplied with Mathematica. The
-output of \verb+geomfix+ is further processed to create the files
-\verb+foo.ps+ and \verb+foo.lab+. This last step is performed by
-\verb+mathlabels+, a \verb+perl+ program. (\verb+perl+ is a widely
-used UNIX utility, and it should be available at your site. If
-\verb+mathfig+ claims that \verb+mathlabels+ cannot be found, it may
-be because \verb+perl+ is not where \verb+mathfig+ expects to find it;
-see the end of \Fullref{Installation}.)
-
-By default, \verb+\mathfig+ creates a figure two inches high and five
-inches wide. A different height can be specified by including the
-assignment \verb+$height=+{\it height} in the Mathematica source file,
-where {\it height} is a number specifying the height in inches. You
-can also say \verb+$width=+{\it width}. The reason to put these numbers
-in the source file, rather than choosing them at run time, is
-archival: in this way the output is entirely determined by the
-contents of the source file.
-
-\begin{wizard}
-Furthermore, if you assign values to the variables \verb+$xlo+,
-\verb+$xhi+, \verb+$ylo+ and \verb+$yhi+, the figure produced by
-Mathematica will be clipped to a window with the given boundaries, and
-rescaled so as to fit in a box of the given height and width. For
-example, setting \verb+$xlo=$ylo=.1+ and \verb+$xhi=$yhi=.9+ will trim
-10\% off the size of the box around each edge, and the remaining
-graphics will be rescaled by a factor of $1/(.9-.1)=1.25$. Under
-Mathematica 1.2, this is the only way I know to make a 3D-graphics
-object occupy the whole bounding box. Unfortunately the values of
-\verb+$xlo+ and so on have to be determined by trial and error.
-
-The symbols \verb+$height+, \verb+$width+, \verb+$xlo+, \verb=$ylo=,
-\verb+$xhi+, \verb=$yhi= and \verb=$Def= should not be used in your
-Mathematica source file except with the meanings described above.
-(\verb=$Def= is used internally.)
-
-When Mathematica generates a picture with labels, the scaling
-computations are implicit in the resulting PostScript code, and they
-take into account the dimensions of the labels present in the code.
-Thus the graph generated by
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-Plot[x,{x,0,1}]
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-looks a bit smaller on the screen than the one generated by
-%
-\begin{verbatim}
-Plot[x,{x,0,1},Ticks->False]
-\end{verbatim}
-%
-because the first has to accomodate labels along the axes, in the same
-size window. However, when you run \verb+mathfig+, the labels are
-taken out of the PostScript file, and therefore don't have any effect
-on the scaling of the picture. The \verb+mathfig+ output for the two
-commands above would be scaled by exactly the same amount, and the
-\TeX\ labels generated for the first command would stick out of the
-bounding box a little bit, just as they do in \Fullref{PStorus}.
-\end{wizard}
-
-\bibliography{manual}
-\bibliographystyle{alpha}
-\vfil\eject
-
-\begin{theindex}
-\end{theindex}
-
-\end{document}
-
-% $Log: manual.tex,v $
-%Revision 1.12 95/07/03 15:57:22 levy
-%update for latex2e
-%
-%Revision 1.11 1993/09/16 22:17:03 levy
-%\tt -> \mediumseries\tt in section heads
-%
-%Revision 1.10 92/08/25 19:55:41 levy
-%typo
-%
-%Revision 1.9 92/08/03 13:47:49 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.8 92/07/22 13:32:23 levy
-%post - TUG meeting
-%
-%Revision 1.7 92/07/17 13:32:29 levy
-%typos
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/07/17 13:27:50 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/07/11 21:26:42 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/04/02 22:45:56 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/04/02 09:58:12 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/04/01 18:57:39 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/19 18:08:13 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/illustrator.pro b/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/illustrator.pro
deleted file mode 100644
index 59fd05cfd75..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/illustrator.pro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,872 +0,0 @@
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_packedarray 2.0 0
-%%Title: (Packed Array Operators)
-%%Version: 2.0
-%%CreationDate: (8/2/90) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-
-userdict /Adobe_packedarray 5 dict dup begin put
-/initialize % - initialize -
-{
-/packedarray where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- Adobe_packedarray begin
- Adobe_packedarray
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- userdict 3 1 roll put
- } forall
- end
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate % - terminate -
-{
-} def
-/packedarray % arguments count packedarray array
-{
-array astore readonly
-} def
-/setpacking % boolean setpacking -
-{
-pop
-} def
-/currentpacking % - setpacking boolean
-{
-false
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_cmykcolor 1.1 0
-%%Title: (CMYK Color Operators)
-%%Version: 1.1
-%%CreationDate: (1/23/89) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_cmykcolor 4 dict dup begin put
-/initialize % - initialize -
-{
-/setcmykcolor where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- userdict /Adobe_cmykcolor_vars 2 dict dup begin put
- /_setrgbcolor
- /setrgbcolor load def
- /_currentrgbcolor
- /currentrgbcolor load def
- Adobe_cmykcolor begin
- Adobe_cmykcolor
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- pop pop
- } forall
- end
- end
- Adobe_cmykcolor begin
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate % - terminate -
-{
-currentdict Adobe_cmykcolor eq
- {
- end
- } if
-} def
-/setcmykcolor % cyan magenta yellow black setcmykcolor -
-{
-1 sub 4 1 roll
-3
- {
- 3 index add neg dup 0 lt
- {
- pop 0
- } if
- 3 1 roll
- } repeat
-Adobe_cmykcolor_vars /_setrgbcolor get exec
-pop
-} def
-/currentcmykcolor % - currentcmykcolor cyan magenta yellow black
-{
-Adobe_cmykcolor_vars /_currentrgbcolor get exec
-3
- {
- 1 sub neg 3 1 roll
- } repeat
-0
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_cshow 1.1 0
-%%Title: (cshow Operator)
-%%Version: 1.1
-%%CreationDate: (1/23/89) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_cshow 3 dict dup begin put
-/initialize % - initialize -
-{
-/cshow where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- userdict /Adobe_cshow_vars 1 dict dup begin put
- /_cshow % - _cshow proc
- {} def
- Adobe_cshow begin
- Adobe_cshow
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- userdict 3 1 roll put
- } forall
- end
- end
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate % - terminate -
-{
-} def
-/cshow % proc string cshow -
-{
-exch
-Adobe_cshow_vars
- exch /_cshow
- exch put
- {
- 0 0 Adobe_cshow_vars /_cshow get exec
- } forall
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_customcolor 1.0 0
-%%Title: (Custom Color Operators)
-%%Version: 1.0
-%%CreationDate: (5/9/88) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_customcolor 5 dict dup begin put
-/initialize % - initialize -
-{
-/setcustomcolor where
- {
- pop
- }
- {
- Adobe_customcolor begin
- Adobe_customcolor
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- pop pop
- } forall
- end
- Adobe_customcolor begin
- } ifelse
-} def
-/terminate % - terminate -
-{
-currentdict Adobe_customcolor eq
- {
- end
- } if
-} def
-/findcmykcustomcolor % cyan magenta yellow black name findcmykcustomcolor object
-{
-5 packedarray
-} def
-/setcustomcolor % object tint setcustomcolor -
-{
-exch
-aload pop pop
-4
- {
- 4 index mul 4 1 roll
- } repeat
-5 -1 roll pop
-setcmykcolor
-} def
-/setoverprint % boolean setoverprint -
-{
-pop
-} def
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-
-%%EndResource
-%%BeginResource: procset Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 1.0 1
-%%Title: (Adobe Illustrator (R) Version 3.0 Abbreviated Prolog)
-%%Version: 1.0
-%%CreationDate: (7/22/89) ()
-%%Copyright: ((C) 1987-1990 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved)
-
-currentpacking true setpacking
-userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 61 dict dup begin put
-% initialization
-/initialize % - initialize -
-{
-% 47 vars, but leave slack of 10 entries for custom Postscript fragments
-userdict /Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 57 dict dup begin put
-
-% paint operands
-/_lp /none def
-/_pf {} def
-/_ps {} def
-/_psf {} def
-/_pss {} def
-/_pjsf {} def
-/_pjss {} def
-/_pola 0 def
-/_doClip 0 def
-
-% paint operators
-/cf currentflat def % - cf flatness
-
-% typography operands
-/_tm matrix def
-/_renderStart [/e0 /r0 /a0 /o0 /e1 /r1 /a1 /i0] def
-/_renderEnd [null null null null /i1 /i1 /i1 /i1] def
-/_render -1 def
-/_rise 0 def
-/_ax 0 def % x character spacing (_ax, _ay, _cx, _cy follows awidthshow naming convention)
-/_ay 0 def % y character spacing
-/_cx 0 def % x word spacing
-/_cy 0 def % y word spacing
-/_leading [0 0] def
-/_ctm matrix def
-/_mtx matrix def
-/_sp 16#020 def
-/_hyphen (-) def
-/_fScl 0 def
-/_cnt 0 def
-/_hs 1 def
-/_nativeEncoding 0 def
-/_useNativeEncoding 0 def
-/_tempEncode 0 def
-/_pntr 0 def
-/_tDict 2 dict def
-
-% typography operators
-/Tx {} def
-/Tj {} def
-
-% compound path operators
-/CRender {} def
-
-% printing
-/_AI3_savepage {} def
-
-% color operands
-/_gf null def
-/_cf 4 array def
-/_if null def
-/_of false def
-/_fc {} def
-/_gs null def
-/_cs 4 array def
-/_is null def
-/_os false def
-/_sc {} def
-/_i null def
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3
- {
- dup xcheck
- {
- bind
- } if
- pop pop
- } forall
-end
-end
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3 begin
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars begin
-newpath
-} def
-/terminate % - terminate -
-{
-end
-end
-} def
-% definition operators
-/_ % - _ null
-null def
-/ddef % key value ddef -
-{
-Adobe_IllustratorA_AI3_vars 3 1 roll put
-} def
-/xput % key value literal xput -
-{
-dup load dup length exch maxlength eq
- {
- dup dup load dup
- length 2 mul dict copy def
- } if
-load begin def end
-} def
-/npop % integer npop -
-{
- {
- pop
- } repeat
-} def
-% marking operators
-/sw % ax ay string sw x y
-{
-dup length exch stringwidth
-exch 5 -1 roll 3 index 1 sub mul add
-4 1 roll 3 1 roll 1 sub mul add
-} def
-/swj % cx cy fillchar ax ay string swj x y
-{
-dup 4 1 roll
-dup length exch stringwidth
-exch 5 -1 roll 3 index 1 sub mul add
-4 1 roll 3 1 roll 1 sub mul add
-6 2 roll /_cnt 0 ddef
-{1 index eq {/_cnt _cnt 1 add ddef} if} forall pop
-exch _cnt mul exch _cnt mul 2 index add 4 1 roll 2 index add 4 1 roll pop pop
-} def
-/ss % ax ay string matrix ss -
-{
-4 1 roll
- { % matrix ax ay char 0 0 {proc} -
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put pop
- gsave
- false charpath currentpoint
- 4 index setmatrix
- stroke
- grestore
- moveto
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-3 npop
-} def
-/jss % cx cy fillchar ax ay string matrix jss -
-{
-4 1 roll
- { % cx cy fillchar matrix ax ay char 0 0 {proc} -
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put
- gsave
- _sp eq
- {
- exch 6 index 6 index 6 index 5 -1 roll widthshow
- currentpoint
- }
- {
- false charpath currentpoint
- 4 index setmatrix stroke
- }ifelse
- grestore
- moveto
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-6 npop
-} def
-
-% path operators
-/sp % ax ay string sp -
-{
- {
- 2 npop (0) exch
- 2 copy 0 exch put pop
- false charpath
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-2 npop
-} def
-/jsp % cx cy fillchar ax ay string jsp -
-{
- { % cx cy fillchar ax ay char 0 0 {proc} -
- 2 npop
- (0) exch 2 copy 0 exch put
- _sp eq
- {
- exch 5 index 5 index 5 index 5 -1 roll widthshow
- }
- {
- false charpath
- }ifelse
- 2 copy rmoveto
- } exch cshow
-5 npop
-} def
-
-% path construction operators
-/pl % x y pl x y
-{
-transform
-0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch
-0.25 sub round 0.25 add exch
-itransform
-} def
-/setstrokeadjust where
- {
- pop true setstrokeadjust
- /c % x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 c -
- {
- curveto
- } def
- /C
- /c load def
- /v % x2 y2 x3 y3 v -
- {
- currentpoint 6 2 roll curveto
- } def
- /V
- /v load def
- /y % x1 y1 x2 y2 y -
- {
- 2 copy curveto
- } def
- /Y
- /y load def
- /l % x y l -
- {
- lineto
- } def
- /L
- /l load def
- /m % x y m -
- {
- moveto
- } def
- }
- {%else
- /c
- {
- pl curveto
- } def
- /C
- /c load def
- /v
- {
- currentpoint 6 2 roll pl curveto
- } def
- /V
- /v load def
- /y
- {
- pl 2 copy curveto
- } def
- /Y
- /y load def
- /l
- {
- pl lineto
- } def
- /L
- /l load def
- /m
- {
- pl moveto
- } def
- }ifelse
-
-% graphic state operators
-/d % array phase d -
-{
-setdash
-} def
-/cf {} def % - cf flatness
-/i % flatness i -
-{
-dup 0 eq
- {
- pop cf
- } if
-setflat
-} def
-/j % linejoin j -
-{
-setlinejoin
-} def
-/J % linecap J -
-{
-setlinecap
-} def
-/M % miterlimit M -
-{
-setmiterlimit
-} def
-/w % linewidth w -
-{
-setlinewidth
-} def
-
-% path painting operators
-/H % - H -
-{} def
-/h % - h -
-{
-closepath
-} def
-/N % - N -
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq {clip /_doClip 0 ddef} if
- newpath
- }
- {
- /CRender {N} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/n % - n -
-{N} def
-/F % - F -
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq
- {
- gsave _pf grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _fc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- _pf
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {F} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/f % - f -
-{
-closepath
-F
-} def
-/S % - S -
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq
- {
- gsave _ps grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- _ps
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {S} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/s % - s -
-{
-closepath
-S
-} def
-/B % - B -
-{
-_pola 0 eq
- {
- _doClip 1 eq % F clears _doClip
- gsave F grestore
- {
- gsave S grestore clip newpath /_lp /none ddef _sc
- /_doClip 0 ddef
- }
- {
- S
- }ifelse
- }
- {
- /CRender {B} ddef
- }ifelse
-} def
-/b % - b -
-{
-closepath
-B
-} def
-/W % - W -
-{
-/_doClip 1 ddef
-} def
-/* % - [string] * -
-{
-count 0 ne
- {
- dup type (stringtype) eq {pop} if
- } if
-_pola 0 eq {newpath} if
-} def
-
-% group operators
-/u % - u -
-{} def
-/U % - U -
-{} def
-/q % - q -
-{
-_pola 0 eq {gsave} if
-} def
-/Q % - Q -
-{
-_pola 0 eq {grestore} if
-} def
-/*u % - *u -
-{
-_pola 1 add /_pola exch ddef
-} def
-/*U % - *U -
-{
-_pola 1 sub /_pola exch ddef
-_pola 0 eq {CRender} if
-} def
-/D % polarized D -
-{pop} def
-/*w % - *w -
-{} def
-/*W % - *W -
-{} def
-
-% place operators
-/` % matrix llx lly urx ury string ` -
-{
-/_i save ddef
-6 1 roll 4 npop
-concat
-userdict begin
-/showpage {} def
-false setoverprint
-pop
-} def
-/~ % - ~ -
-{
-end
-_i restore
-} def
-
-% color operators
-/O % flag O -
-{
-0 ne
-/_of exch ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/R % flag R -
-{
-0 ne
-/_os exch ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/g % gray g -
-{
-/_gf exch ddef
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _gf setgray
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/G % gray G -
-{
-/_gs exch ddef
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _gs setgray
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/k % cyan magenta yellow black k -
-{
-_cf astore pop
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _cf aload pop setcmykcolor
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/K % cyan magenta yellow black K -
-{
-_cs astore pop
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _cs aload pop setcmykcolor
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/x % cyan magenta yellow black name gray x -
-{
-/_gf exch ddef
-findcmykcustomcolor
-/_if exch ddef
-/_fc
-{
-_lp /fill ne
- {
- _of setoverprint
- _if _gf 1 exch sub setcustomcolor
- /_lp /fill ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_pf
-{
-_fc
-fill
-} ddef
-/_psf
-{
-_fc
-ashow
-} ddef
-/_pjsf
-{
-_fc
-awidthshow
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-/X % cyan magenta yellow black name gray X -
-{
-/_gs exch ddef
-findcmykcustomcolor
-/_is exch ddef
-/_sc
-{
-_lp /stroke ne
- {
- _os setoverprint
- _is _gs 1 exch sub setcustomcolor
- /_lp /stroke ddef
- } if
-} ddef
-/_ps
-{
-_sc
-stroke
-} ddef
-/_pss
-{
-_sc
-ss
-} ddef
-/_pjss
-{
-_sc
-jss
-} ddef
-/_lp /none ddef
-} def
-
-% locked object operator
-/A % value A -
-{
-pop
-} def
-
-currentdict readonly pop end
-setpacking
-
-% annotate page operator
-/annotatepage
-{
-} def
-%%EndResource
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/math.pro b/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/math.pro
deleted file mode 100644
index e05e6c4bd3f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/dvips/geomsty/math.pro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1752 +0,0 @@
-% This file is adapted from the PostScript code that gets
-% included by the psfix filter, provided with Mathematica.
-% The only differences are the addition of the first two lines
-% (MyDict) and of the abbreviations at the end (starting with /Ma).
-
-%$Revision: 1.3 $
-%$Date: 95/06/27 12:16:53 $
-
-/MyDict 200 dict def
-MyDict begin
-
-% The externally visible functions are:
-% MathPictureStart- start page.
-% MathPictureEnd - finish off page.
-% MathSubStart - start a sub-page.
-% MathSubEnd - finish off a sub-page.
-% Mdot - draw a dot.
-% Mtetra - draw a filled tetragon.
-% Metetra - draw a filled tetragon with black edges.
-% Mistroke - intermediate stroke of multi-stroke line/curve.
-% Mfstroke - final stroke of multi-stroke line/curve.
-% Msboxa - compute coordinates of text bounding box.
-% Mshowa - plot characters.
-% MathScale - compute scaling info to contain array of points.
-
-
-% The following are only for backwards compatibility with earlier versions
-% of Mathematica:
-% Mpstart - identical to MathPictureStart.
-% Mpend - identical to MathPictureEnd.
-% Mscale - like MathScale but without user coordinate info.
-
-/Mpstart { % - Mpstart -
- MathPictureStart
-} bind def
-
-/Mpend { % - Mpend -
- MathPictureEnd
-} bind def
-
-/Mscale { % [pnts] Mscale -
- 0 1 0 1 % [pnts] xbias xscale ybias yscale
- 5 -1 roll % xbias xscale ybias yscale [pnts]
- MathScale % -
-} bind def
-
-%start of ISOLatin1 stuff
-
-/ISOLatin1Encoding dup where
-{ pop pop }
-{
-[
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/space /exclam /quotedbl /numbersign /dollar /percent /ampersand /quoteright
-/parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /minus /period /slash
-/zero /one /two /three /four /five /six /seven
-/eight /nine /colon /semicolon /less /equal /greater /question
-/at /A /B /C /D /E /F /G
-/H /I /J /K /L /M /N /O
-/P /Q /R /S /T /U /V /W
-/X /Y /Z /bracketleft /backslash /bracketright /asciicircum /underscore
-/quoteleft /a /b /c /d /e /f /g
-/h /i /j /k /l /m /n /o
-/p /q /r /s /t /u /v /w
-/x /y /z /braceleft /bar /braceright /asciitilde /.notdef
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
-/dotlessi /grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent
-/dieresis /.notdef /ring /cedilla /.notdef /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron
-/space /exclamdown /cent /sterling /currency /yen /brokenbar /section
-/dieresis /copyright /ordfeminine /guillemotleft
-/logicalnot /hyphen /registered /macron
-/degree /plusminus /twosuperior /threesuperior
-/acute /mu /paragraph /periodcentered
-/cedilla /onesuperior /ordmasculine /guillemotright
-/onequarter /onehalf /threequarters /questiondown
-/Agrave /Aacute /Acircumflex /Atilde /Adieresis /Aring /AE /Ccedilla
-/Egrave /Eacute /Ecircumflex /Edieresis /Igrave /Iacute /Icircumflex /Idieresis
-/Eth /Ntilde /Ograve /Oacute /Ocircumflex /Otilde /Odieresis /multiply
-/Oslash /Ugrave /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Udieresis /Yacute /Thorn /germandbls
-/agrave /aacute /acircumflex /atilde /adieresis /aring /ae /ccedilla
-/egrave /eacute /ecircumflex /edieresis /igrave /iacute /icircumflex /idieresis
-/eth /ntilde /ograve /oacute /ocircumflex /otilde /odieresis /divide
-/oslash /ugrave /uacute /ucircumflex /udieresis /yacute /thorn /ydieresis
-] def
-} ifelse
-
-/MFontDict 50 dict def
-
-/MStrCat % string1 string2 MStrCat string
-{
- exch % s2 s1
- dup length % s2 s1 len
- 2 index length add % s2 s1 len
- string % s2 s1 s
- dup 3 1 roll % s2 s s1 s
- copy % s2 s s1
- length % s2 s where
- exch dup % s2 where s s
- 4 2 roll exch % s s where s2
- putinterval
-} def
-
-/MCreateEncoding % name encoding MCreateEncoding newname
-{
- % get base name
- 1 index % name encoding name
-
- % concatenate (-) and encoding to the name
- 255 string cvs
- (-) MStrCat
- 1 index MStrCat
- cvn exch % basename newname encoding
-
- % make encoding name
-
- (Encoding) MStrCat
- cvn dup where
- {
- exch get
- }
- {
- pop
- StandardEncoding
- } ifelse
- 3 1 roll % vector basename newname
-
- % make the font if we haven't before
- dup MFontDict exch known not
- {
- 1 index findfont
- dup length dict
- begin
- {1 index /FID ne
- {def}
- {pop pop}
- ifelse} forall
- /Encoding 3 index
- def
- currentdict
- end
- 1 index exch definefont pop
-
- MFontDict 1 index
- null put
- }
- if
-
- exch pop % vector newname
- exch pop % newname
-} def
-
-/ISOLatin1 { (ISOLatin1) MCreateEncoding } def
-/ISO8859 { (ISOLatin1) MCreateEncoding } def
-
-%end of ISOLatin1 stuff
-
-%
-% Include old font names for backward compatibility
-%
-/Mcopyfont { % procedure to copy font
- dup
- maxlength
- dict
- exch
- {
- 1 index
- /FID
- eq
- {
- pop pop
- }
- {
- 2 index
- 3 1 roll
- put
- }
- ifelse
- }
- forall
-} def
-
-/Plain /Courier findfont Mcopyfont definefont pop
-/Bold /Courier-Bold findfont Mcopyfont definefont pop
-/Italic /Courier-Oblique findfont Mcopyfont definefont pop
-
-% Set up for the start of a page.
-/MathPictureStart { % - MathPictureStart -
- gsave % -
- Mtransform % possibly rotate to landscape mode
- Mlmarg % left_margin
- Mbmarg % bottom_margin
- translate % -
- Mwidth % init_width
- Mlmarg Mrmarg add % init_width lmarg+rmarg
- sub % true_width
- /Mwidth exch def %
- Mheight % init_height
- Mbmarg Mtmarg add % init_height tmarg+bmarg
- sub % true_height
- /Mheight exch def
- /Mtmatrix % /Mtmatrix
- matrix currentmatrix % /Mtmatrix text_matrix
- def
- /Mgmatrix % /Mgmatrix
- matrix currentmatrix % /Mgmatrix graphics_matrix
- def % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Finish off a page.
-/MathPictureEnd {
- grestore
-} bind def
-
-%MFill fills the drawing area with the current color.
-/MFill {
- 0 0 moveto
- Mwidth 0 lineto
- Mwidth Mheight lineto
- 0 Mheight lineto
- fill
-} bind def
-
-% xmin xmax ymin ymax MPlotRegion alters the origin, Mwidth and Mheight
-% so that the picture fills the altered region
-/MPlotRegion { % xmin xmax ymin ymax MPlotRegion
- 3 index % xmin xmax ymin ymax xmin
- Mwidth mul % xmin xmax ymin ymax xmin_pos
- 2 index % xmin xmax ymin ymax xmin_pos ymin
- Mheight mul % xmin xmax ymin ymax xmin_pos ymin_pos
- translate % xmin xmax ymin ymax
- exch sub % xmin xmax ymax-ymin
- Mheight mul % xmin xmax new_height
- /Mheight
- exch def % xmin xmax
- exch sub % xmax-xmin
- Mwidth mul % new-width
- /Mwidth
- exch def
-} bind def
-
-% Given a rectangle, set it up as a sub-picture.
-/MathSubStart { % xmin ymin xmax ymax MathSubStart <saved state(8)>
- Momatrix
- Mgmatrix Mtmatrix
- Mwidth Mheight % xmin ymin xmax ymax <ss(8)>
- 7 -2 roll % xmin ymin <ss(8)> xmax ymax
- moveto % xmin ymin <ss(8)>
- Mtmatrix setmatrix % xmin ymin <ss(8)>
- currentpoint % xmin ymin <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t)
- Mgmatrix setmatrix % xmin ymin <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t)
- 9 -2 roll % <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t) xmin ymin
- moveto % <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t)
- Mtmatrix setmatrix % <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t)
- currentpoint % <ss(8)> xmax(t) ymax(t) xmin(t) ymin(t)
- 2 copy translate % <ss(8)> xmax ymax xmin ymin
- /Mtmatrix matrix currentmatrix def
- 3 -1 roll % <ss(8)> xmax xmin ymin ymax
- exch sub % <ss(8)> xmax xmin height
- /Mheight exch def % <ss(8)> xmax xmin
- sub % <ss(8)> width
- /Mwidth exch def % <ss(8)>
-} bind def
-
-
-% Restore the saved state left by the matching MathSubStart.
-% Note, we also leave with the new Mgmatrix as the current matrix.
-/MathSubEnd { % gmat tmat lm rm bm tm w h MathSubStart -
- /Mheight exch def % gmat tmat lm rm bm tm w
- /Mwidth exch def % gmat tmat lm rm bm tm
- /Mtmatrix exch def % gmat
- dup setmatrix % gmat
- /Mgmatrix exch def % -
- /Momatrix exch def % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a point, draw a dot.
-/Mdot { % x y Mdot -
- moveto % -
- 0 0 rlineto % -
- stroke % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given 4 points, draw the corresponding filled tetragon.
-/Mtetra { % x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Mtetra -
- moveto % x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2
- lineto % x0 y0 x1 y1
- lineto % x0 y0
- lineto % -
- fill % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given 4 points, draw the corresponding filled tetragon with black edges.
-% Note, this leaves the gray level at 0 (for compatibility with the old
-% C code.
-/Metetra { % x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Metetra -
- moveto % x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2
- lineto % x0 y0 x1 y1
- lineto % x0 y0
- lineto % -
- closepath % -
- gsave % -
- fill % -
- grestore % -
- 0 setgray % -
- stroke % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Mistroke is called to stroke intermediate parts of a path. It makes
-% sure to resynchronize the dashing pattern and to leave the current point
-% as the final point of the path.
-/Mistroke { % - Mistroke -
- flattenpath % -
- 0 0 0 % length x y
- { % length x y new_x new_y (for moves)
- 4 2 roll % length new_x new_y x y
- pop pop % length new_x new_y
- }
- { % length x y new_x new_y (for lines)
- 4 -1 roll % length y new_x new_y x
- 2 index % length y new_x new_y x new_x
- sub dup mul % length y new_x new_y dx*dx
- 4 -1 roll % length new_x new_y dx*dx y
- 2 index % length new_x new_y dx*dx y new_y
- sub dup mul % length new_x new_y dx*dx dy*dy
- add sqrt % length new_x new_y dlen
- 4 -1 roll % new_x new_y dlen length
- add % new_x new_y new_length
- 3 1 roll % new_length new_x new_y
- }
- { % length x y x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 (for curves)
- stop % should never be called
- }
- { % length x y (for closepaths)
- stop % should never be called
- }
- pathforall % length x y
- pop pop % length
- currentpoint % length final_x final_y
- stroke % length final_x final_y
- moveto % length
- currentdash % length dash_array dash_offset
- 3 -1 roll % dash_array dash_offset length
- add % dash_array new_offset
- setdash % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Mfstroke is called to stroke the final parts of a path. It resets
-% the dashing pattern to compensate for any adjustments made by Mistroke.
-/Mfstroke { % - Mfstroke -
- stroke % -
- currentdash % dash_array dash_offset
- pop 0 % dash_array 0
- setdash % -
-} bind def
-
-
-
-% Mrotsboxa is the same as Msboxa except that it takes an angle
-% form the stack and the box is calculated for text rendered at this angle.
-% It gsaves in case we are starting a MathSubStart
-% save Mrot so that Msboxa can convert bouding box back to the non-rotated
-% coordinate system
-% call Mrotcheck to alter the offsets into the rotated system
-% converts Mtmatrix to render in the rotated system
-% the calls Msboxa which does all the work
-% at the end Mtmatrix is restored and Mrot is reset to 0
-/Mrotsboxa { % [str..] gx gy sx sy ang Mrotsboxa ... Msboxa
- gsave % in case in MathSubStart
- dup % [str..] gx gy sx sy ang ang
- /Mrot
- exch def % [str..] gx gy sx sy ang
- Mrotcheck % [str..] gx gy sx_new sy_new ang
- Mtmatrix % [str..] gx gy sx sy ang Mtmatrix
- dup
- setmatrix
- 7 1 roll % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang
- 4 index % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang gx
- 4 index % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang gx gy
- translate % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang
- rotate % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy
- 3 index % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy gx
- -1 mul % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy -gx
- 3 index % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy -gx gy
- -1 mul % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy -gx -gy
- translate % Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy
- /Mtmatrix % now change Mtmatrix to be this new currentmatrix
- matrix
- currentmatrix
- def
- grestore % grestore to deal with MathSubStart
- Msboxa % Mtmatrix [ x y x y] [ x y x y]
- 3 -1 roll % [x y x y ] [x y x y] Mtmatrix
- /Mtmatrix
- exch def % restore Mtmatrix
- /Mrot
- 0 def % restore Mrot
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given an array of strings ([str...]), which represent consecutive lines
-% of text, a position in graphics coordinates (gx,gy) and a position in
-% the bounding box coordinates (sx,sy), compute the low and high coordinates
-% of the resulting text, in the [gx gy tx ty] form, which corresponds to
-% the point (gx,gy) (in graphics coordinates) plus the offset (tx,ty) (in
-% text coordinates).
-% Note, Msboxa assumes that the current matrix is the text matrix.
-% Mboxout is called in case we are in Mouter to make the box bigger
-% Mboxrot adjusts the box to account for a rotation to convert the box
-% into a nonrotated coordinate system
-%
-/Msboxa { % [str...] gx gy sx sy Msboxa [gx gy tlx tly] [gx gy thx thy]
- newpath % [str...] gx gy sx sy (just in case)
- 5 -1 roll % gx gy sx sy [str...]
- Mvboxa % gx gy sx sy blx bly bhx bhy [off...]
- pop % gx gy sx sy blx bly bhx bhy
- Mboxout % adjust box for Minner
- 6 -1 roll % gx gy sy blx bly bhx bhy sx
- 5 -1 roll % gx gy sy bly bhx bhy sx blx
- 4 -1 roll % gx gy sy bly bhy sx blx bhx
- Msboxa1 % gx gy sy bly bhy tlx thx
- 5 -3 roll % gx gy tlx thx sy bly bhy
- Msboxa1 % gx gy tlx thx tly thy
- Mboxrot % adjust box for rotation
- [ % gx gy tlx thx tly thy mark
- 7 -2 roll % tlx thx tly thy mark gx gy
- 2 copy % tlx thx tly thy mark gx gy gx gy
- [ % tlx thx tly thy mark gx gy gx gy mark
- 3 1 roll % tlx thx tly thy mark gx gy mark gx gy
- 10 -1 roll % thx tly thy mark gx gy mark gx gy tlx
- 9 -1 roll % thx thy mark gx gy mark gx gy tlx tly
- ] % thx thy mark gx gy [gx gy tlx tly]
- 6 1 roll % [gx gy tlx tly] thx thy mark gx gy
- 5 -2 roll % [gx gy tlx tly] mark gx gy thx thy
- ] % [gx gy tlx tly] [gx gy thx thy]
-} bind def
-
-% Msboxa1 is an internal function which, given a bounding box coordinate
-% (sz), and the bounding box limits (blz and bhz), computes the actual
-% offsets (tlz = (blz-bhz)(sz+1)/2, thz = (blz-bhz)(sz-1)/2).
-/Msboxa1 { % sz blz bhz Msboxa1 tlz thz
- sub % sz blz-bhz
- 2 div % sz (blz-bhz)/2
- dup % sz (blz-bhz)/2 (blz-bhz)/2
- 2 index % sz (blz-bhz)/2 (blz-bhz)/2 sz
- 1 add % sz (blz-bhz)/2 (blz-bhz)/2 sz+1
- mul % sz (blz-bhz)/2 tlz
- 3 -1 roll % (blz-bhz)/2 tlz sz
- -1 add % (blz-bhz)/2 tlz sz-1
- 3 -1 roll % tlz sz-1 (blz-bhz)/2
- mul % tlz thz
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a (non-empty) array of strings ([str...]) calculate the
-% bounding box. We do this for fixedwidth fonts or nonfixedwidth fonts
-% depending upon the setting of Mfixwid. Mvboxa1 actually does a lot
-% of the work. For nonfixedwidth fonts the length of the bounding
-% box length is made to be the summation of [(str)..] Mwidthcal
-% ie the maximum length of the strings and xlow
-%
-/Mvboxa { % [str...] Mvboxa xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...]
- Mfixwid
- {
- Mvboxa1
- }
- {
- dup % [str...] [str...]
- Mwidthcal % [str...] [ w1 w2...]
- 0 exch % [str...] 0 [ w1 w2...]
- {
- add
- }
- forall % [str...] length
- exch
- Mvboxa1 % length xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...]
- 4 index % length xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...] xlow
- 7 -1 roll % xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...] xlow length
- add % xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...] new_xhigh
- 4 -1 roll
- pop % xlow ylow yhigh [off...] new_xhigh
- 3 1 roll % xlow ylow new_xhigh yhigh [off...]
- }
- ifelse
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a (non-empty) array of strings ([str...]) which represent consecutive
-% lines of text, compute the total bounding box assuming that we start at
-% (0,0) and the array of y offsets to place the lines correctly.
-% Note, Mvboxa assumes that the current matrix is the text matrix.
-% Note, Mvboxa does not alter the current path.
-% The vertical spacing is set so that the bounding boxes of adjacent lines
-% are .3 times the width of an `m' apart.
-/Mvboxa1 { % [str...] Mvboxa xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...]
- gsave % [str...]
- newpath % [str...] (clear path fragments)
- [ true % [str...] mark true
- 3 -1 roll % mark true [str...]
- { % mark {true -or- off... Xl Yl Xh Yh false} str
- Mbbox % mark {true -or- off... Xl Yl Xh Yh false} xl yl xh yh
- 5 -1 roll % mark { - -or- off... Xl Yl Xh Yh} xl yl xh yh first?
- { % mark xl yl xh yh
- 0 % mark xl yl xh yh off1
- 5 1 roll % mark off1 xl yl xh yh
- } % mark off1 XL YL XH YH
- { % mark off... Xl Yl Xh Yh xl yl xh yh
- 7 -1 roll % mark off... Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh yh Yl
- exch sub % mark off... Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh yh-Yl
- (m) stringwidth pop % mark off... Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh yh-Yl pntsize
- .3 mul % mark off... Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh yh-Yl fudge
- sub % mark off... Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh off
- 7 1 roll % mark off... off Xl Xh Yh xl yl xh
- 6 -1 roll % mark off... off Xh Yh xl yl xh Xl
- 4 -1 roll % mark off... off Xh Yh yl xh Xl xl
- Mmin % mark off... off Xh Yh yl xh XL
- 3 -1 roll % mark off... off Xh Yh xh XL yl
- 5 index % mark off... off Xh Yh xh XL yl off
- add % mark off... off Xh Yh xh XL YL
- 5 -1 roll % mark off... off Yh xh XL YL Xh
- 4 -1 roll % mark off... off Yh XL YL Xh xh
- Mmax % mark off... off Yh XL YL XH
- 4 -1 roll % mark off... off XL YL XH YH
- } % mark off... XL YL XH YH
- ifelse % mark off... XL YL XH YH
- false % mark off... XL YL XH YH false
- } % mark off... XL YL XH YH false
- forall % mark off... xlow ylow xhigh yhigh false
- { stop } if % mark off... xlow ylow xhigh yhigh
- counttomark % mark off... xlow ylow xhigh yhigh (#off's+4)
- 1 add % mark off... xlow ylow xhigh yhigh (#off's+5)
- 4 roll % xlow ylow xhigh yhigh mark off...
- ] % xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...]
- grestore % xlow ylow xhigh yhigh [off...]
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a string, compute the bounding box assuming that we start at (0,0).
-% Note, the path is assumed to be empty, and we are assumed to be in text
-% coordinates. Allows for long strings.
-/Mbbox { % str Mbbox xlow ylow xhigh yhigh
- 1 dict begin
- 0 0 moveto % str
- /temp (T) def
- { gsave
- currentpoint newpath moveto
- temp 0 3 -1 roll put temp
- false charpath flattenpath currentpoint
- pathbbox
- grestore moveto lineto moveto} forall
- pathbbox
- newpath
- end
-} bind def
-
-
-% Compute the minimum of two numbers.
-/Mmin { % p q Mmin min(p,q)
- 2 copy % p q p q
- gt % p q p>q?
- { exch } if % min(p,q) max(p,q)
- pop % min(p,q)
-} bind def
-
-
-% Compute the maximum of two numbers.
-/Mmax { % p q Mmax max(p,q)
- 2 copy % p q p q
- lt % p q p<q?
- { exch } if % max(p,q) min(p,q)
- pop % max(p,q)
-} bind def
-
-% Mrotshowa is the same as Mshowa except that it takes an angle
-% from the stack and the text is rendered at this angle.
-% It saves Mrot (not really needed but saved anyway)
-% calls Mrotcheck to adjust the offsets into the rotated coordinate system
-% converts Mtmatrix to render in the rotated system
-% and calls Mshowa which does all the work
-% at the end Mtmatrix is restored and Mrot is reset to zero.
-%
-/Mrotshowa { %[str..] gx gy sx sy ang Mrotshowa
- dup
- /Mrot
- exch def
- Mrotcheck
- Mtmatrix %[str..] gx gy sx sy ang Mtmatrix
- dup
- setmatrix
- 7 1 roll %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang
- 4 index %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang gx
- 4 index %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy ang gx gy
- translate
- rotate %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy
- 3 index
- -1 mul
- 3 index
- -1 mul %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy -gx -gy
- translate
- /Mtmatrix
- matrix
- currentmatrix
- def %Mtmatrix [str..] gx gy sx sy
- Mgmatrix setmatrix
- Mshowa %Mtmatrix
- /Mtmatrix
- exch def
- /Mrot 0 def % restore Mrot
-} bind def
-
-%
-% Given an array of strings ([str...]), which represent consecutive lines
-% of text, a position in graphics coordinates (gx,gy) and a position in
-% the bounding box coordinates (sx,sy), display the strings.
-% Mboxout is called in case we are in Mouter
-%
-/Mshowa { % [str...] gx gy sx sy Mshowa -
- 4 -2 roll % [str...] sx sy gx gy
- moveto % [str...] sx sy
- 2 index % [str...] sx sy [str...]
- Mtmatrix setmatrix % [str...] sx sy [str...]
- Mvboxa % [str...] sx sy tlx tly thx thy [off...]
- 7 1 roll % [str...] [off...] sx sy tlx tly thx thy
- Mboxout
- 6 -1 roll % [str...] [off...] sy tlx tly thx thy sx
- 5 -1 roll % [str...] [off...] sy tly thx thy sx tlx
- 4 -1 roll % [str...] [off...] sy tly thy sx tlx thx
- Mshowa1 % [str...] [off...] sy tly thy relx
- 4 1 roll % [str...] [off...] relx sy tly thy
- Mshowa1 % [str...] [off...] relx rely
- rmoveto % [str...] [off...]
- currentpoint % [str...] [off...] x y
- Mfixwid
- {
- Mshowax
- }
- {
- Mshoway
- }
- ifelse
- pop pop pop pop
- Mgmatrix setmatrix
-} bind def
-
-
-% This is used for fixedwidth fonts
-% It simply shows each string and advances the y direction by the offset
-%
-/Mshowax {
- 0 1
- 4 index length % [str...] [off...] x y 0 1 (#strings)
- -1 add % [str...] [off...] x y 0 1 (#strings-1)
- { % [str...] [off...] x y strnum
- 2 index % [str...] [off...] x y strnum x
- 4 index % [str...] [off...] x y strnum x [off...]
- 2 index % [str...] [off...] x y strnum [off...] strnum
- get % [str...] [off...] x y strnum x off
- 3 index % [str...] [off...] x y strnum x off y
- add % [str...] [off...] x y strnum x Y
- moveto % [str...] [off...] x y strnum
- 4 index % [str...] [off...] x y strnum [str...]
- exch get % [str...] [off...] x y str
- Mfixdash
- {
- Mfixdashp
- }
- if
- show % [str...] [off...] x y
- } for % [str...] [off...] x y
-} bind def
-
-% Fix if all dashes and length > 1
-/Mfixdashp { % str
- dup
- length % str n
- 1
- gt % str bool
- 1 index % str bool str
- true exch % str bool true str
- {
- 45
- eq
- and
- } forall
- and % str bool
- {
- gsave
- (--)
- stringwidth pop
- (-)
- stringwidth pop
- sub
- 2 div % str lenfix
- 0 rmoveto % str
- dup % str str
- length
- 1 sub % str len-1
- {
- (-)
- show
- }
- repeat
- grestore
- }
- if % x y str
-} bind def
-
-
-% This is for non-fixedwidth fonts
-% It shows each character individually advancing the x position by
-% the maximum width of any character in that position
-%
-/Mshoway {
- 3 index % [str...] [off...] x y [str...]
- Mwidthcal % [str...] [off...] x y [w1 w2 w3...]
- 5 1 roll % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y
- 0 1 % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y 0 1
- 4 index length % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y 0 1 (#strings)
- -1 add % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y 0 1 (#strings-1)
- { % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum
- 2 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum x
- 4 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum x [off...]
- 2 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y
- % strnum [off...] strnum
- get % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum x off
- 3 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum x off y
- add % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum x Y
- moveto % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum
- 4 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y strnum [str...]
- exch get % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y str
- [
- 6 index % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y str [ [w1 w2..]
- aload
- length % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y str [ w1 w2.. len
- 2 add
- -1 roll % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [ w1 w2.. str
- {
- pop % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [ w1 c2.. str am
- Strform % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [ w1 w2.. str 1str
- stringwidth
- pop
- neg
- exch % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [ w1 w2..
- % str -cm cn
- add
- 0 rmoveto % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [ w1 w2.. str
- }
- exch
- kshow % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y [
- cleartomark
- } for % [w1 w2 w3..] [str...] [off...] x y
- pop
-} bind def
-
-%
-% This is a central mechanism for dealing with non-fixedwidth fonts.
-% Given an array of strings Mwidthcal returns an array of the lengths
-% of the longest character in the corresponding positions in the arrays.
-% Thus the 4th element of the result is the maximum character width of
-% each strin at the 4th position.
-%
-/Mwidthcal { % [(abc) (abc) ..] Mwidthcal [w1 w2 w3 ...]
- [
- exch % [ [(abc) (abd) ..]
- {
- Mwidthcal1
- }
- forall
- ] % [[w w w] [w w w] ..]
- [ % call this [chr ..] now
- exch % [ [chr ..]
- dup % [ [chr ..] [chr ..]
- Maxlen % [ [chr ..] maxlen
- -1 add
- 0 1
- 3 -1 roll % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] 0 1 maxlen-1
- {
- [ % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] n [
- exch % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] [ n
- 2 index % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] [ n [chr ..]
- {
- 1 index
- Mget % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] [ n [w1 w2 ..] n
- exch % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] [ wn n
- }
- forall
- pop % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] [ w1 w2 w3
- Maxget % [chr ..] [ [chr ..] wmax
- exch % [chr ..] [ wmax [chr ..]
- }
- for
- pop
- ] % [ wmax1 wmax2 wmax3 ..]
- Mreva
-} bind def
-
-%Reverse an array
-/Mreva { %[a b c ..] Mreva [.. c b a]
- [
- exch %[ [a b c ..]
- aload
- length %[a b c .. len
- -1 1 %[a b c .. len -1 1
- {1 roll}
- for
- ] %[.. c b a]
-} bind def
-
-% take an array and an index and return that element if index exits
-% if array not long enougth return zero
-/Mget { %[a b c d..] index
- 1 index
- length %[a b c d..] index len
- -1 add
- 1 index %[a b c d..] index (len-1) index
- ge
- {
- get %if long enough return entry
- }
- {
- pop pop
- 0 %if not long enough return zero
- }
- ifelse
-} bind def
-
-%Take an array of arrays and return the longest length
-/Maxlen { %[ arr1 arr2 arr3 ] Maxlen maxlen
- [ %[ arr1 arr2 arr3 ] [
- exch %[ [ arr1 arr2 arr3 ]
- {
- length
- }
- forall %[ len1 len2 len3..
- Maxget
-} bind def
-
-%Take a series of numbers starting with [ and return the largest member
-/Maxget { %[n1 n2 n3 .. Maxget nmax
- counttomark %[n1 n2 n3 .. len
- -1 add %[n1 n2 n3 .. len-1
- 1 1 %[n1 n2 n3 .. len 1 1
- 3 -1 roll %[n1 n2 n3 .. 1 1 (len-1)
- {
- pop
- Mmax
- }
- for %[ nmax
- exch % nmax [
- pop % nmax
-} bind def
-
-%Take a string and return an array of the lengths of the characters
-/Mwidthcal1 { % str Mwidthcal1 [w1 w2 w3 ..]
- [
- exch %[ (str)
- {
- Strform
- stringwidth
- pop
- }
- forall %[w1 w2 w3 ..
- ] %[w1 w2 w3 ..]
-} bind def
-
-%put a string onto the stack
-/Strform { % num
- /tem (x) def
- tem 0
- 3 -1 roll
- put
- tem
-} bind def
-
-%/Mwidmax { % [str...]
-% dup % [str...] [str...]
-% [ % [str...] [str...] [
-% exch % [str...] [ [str...]
-% {
-% stringwidth
-% pop
-% }
-% forall % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn
-% 0
-% counttomark % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn 0 n
-% -2 add % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn 0 (n-1)
-% 1 exch % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn 0 1 (n-1)
-% 1 exch % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn 0 1 1 (n-1)
-% {
-% 3 index % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn num pos wm
-% 3 index % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm wn num pos wm wn
-% ge
-% { % wm >= wn
-% exch pop
-% exch pop % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wm num
-% }
-% { % wm < wn
-% pop
-% 3 -1 roll
-% pop % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wn pos < pos -> num >
-% }
-% ifelse % [str...] [ w1 w2 ... wmax nmax
-% }
-% for % [str...] [ wmax nmax
-% 4 1 roll
-% pop pop % nmax [str...]
-% length % nmax len
-% -1 add % nmax (len - 1)
-% exch
-% sub % max_pos
-%} bind def
-
-
-% Mshowa1 is an internal routine which, given a bounding box coordinate
-% (sz), and the bounding box limits if we started drawing at 0 (tlz and thz),
-% computes the offset at which to start drawing
-% (relz = (sz-1)tlz/2 - (sz+1)thz/2 = sz(tlz-thz)/2-(tlz+thz)/2).
-/Mshowa1 { % sz tlz thz Mshowa1 relz
- 2 copy % sz tlz thz tlz thz
- add % sz tlz thz tlz+thz
- 4 1 roll % tlz+thz sz tlz thz
- sub % tlz+thz sz tlz-thz
- mul % tlz+thz sz(tlz-thz)
- sub % tlz+thz-sz(tlz-thz)
- -2 div % sz(tlz-thz)/2-(tlz+thz)/2
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given the x and y scaling to user coordinates and an array of points to
-% fit (xbias xscale ybias yscale [pnts]), set up the scaling. The array
-% must contain atleast two points, and the last two must be of the form
-% [gxlow gylow 0 0] and [gxhigh gyhigh 0 0].
-% Note, MathScale assumes that we are already scaled so that the active area
-% is the rectangle [0,Mwidth-Mlmarg-Mrmarg]x[0,Mheight-Mbmarg-Mtmarg].
-% also keep bias and scale info for PostScript commands
-/MathScale { % <user> [pnts] MathScale -
- Mwidth % <user> [pnts] width
- Mheight % <user> [pnts] width height
- Mlp % <user> Ax Ay Bx By
- translate % <user> Ax Ay
- scale % <user>
- /yscale exch def
- /ybias exch def
- /xscale exch def
- /xbias exch def
- /Momatrix % this transforms from
- xscale yscale matrix scale % Original to Display coordinates
- xbias ybias matrix translate
- matrix concatmatrix def
- /Mgmatrix % /Mgmatrix
- matrix currentmatrix % /Mgmatrix graphics_matrix
- def % -
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a non-empty array of points to fit ([p]) and a maximum width (sx)
-% and height (sy) find the largest scale (Ax and Ay) and offsets (Bx and By)
-% such that the transformation
-% [gx gy tx ty] -> (Ax gx + tx + bx, Ay gy + ty + By)
-% maps the points into the rectangle [0,sx]x[0,sy]
-/Mlp { % [p] sx sy Mlp Ax Ay Bx By
- 3 copy % [p] sx sy [p] sx sy
- Mlpfirst % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- { % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- Mnodistort % [p] sx sy Ax Ay nodistort?
- { % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- Mmin % [p] sx sy A
- dup % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- } if % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- 4 index % [p] sx sy Ax Ay [p]
- 2 index % [p] sx sy Ax Ay [p] Ax
- 2 index % [p] sx sy Ax Ay [p] Ax Ay
- Mlprun % [p] sx sy Ax Ay ctx wtx cgx wgx cty wty cgy wgy
- 11 index % [p] sx sy Ax Ay ctx wtx cgx wgx cty wty cgy wgy sx
- 11 -1 roll % [p] sx sy Ay ctx wtx cgx wgx cty wty cgy wgy sx Ax
- 10 -4 roll % [p] sx sy Ay cty wty cgy wgy sx Ax ctx wtx cgx wgx
- Mlp1 % [p] sx sy Ay cty wty cgy wgy Ax Bx xok?
- 8 index % [p] sx sy Ay cty wty cgy wgy Ax Bx xok? sy
- 9 -5 roll % [p] sx sy Ax Bx xok? sy Ay cty wty cgy wgy
- Mlp1 % [p] sx sy Ax Bx xok? Ay By yok?
- 4 -1 roll % [p] sx sy Ax Bx Ay By yok? xok?
- and % [p] sx sy Ax Bx Ay By ok?
- { exit } if % [p] sx sy Ax Bx Ay By
- 3 -1 roll % [p] sx sy Ax Ay Bx By
- pop pop % [p] sx sy Ax Ay
- } loop % [p] sx sy Ax Bx Ay By
- exch % [p] sx sy Ax Bx By Ay
- 3 1 roll % [p] sx sy Ax Ay Bx By
- 7 -3 roll % Ax Ay Bx By [p] sx sy
- pop pop pop % Ax Ay Bx By
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given an array of points in the [gx gy tx ty] form, with the last two
-% being [gxlow gylow 0 0] and [gxhigh gyhigh 0 0], and the width and height
-% (sx and sy) in which to fit them, compute the maximum scaling (Ax and Ay).
-/Mlpfirst { % [pnts] sx sy Mlpfirst Ax Ay
- 3 -1 roll % sx sy [pnts]
- dup length % sx sy [pnts] #pnts
- 2 copy % sx sy [pnts] #pnts [pnts] #pnts
- -2 add % sx sy [pnts] #pnts [pnts] #pnts-2
- get % sx sy [pnts] #pnts [gxl gyl 0 0]
- aload % sx sy [pnts] #pnts gxl gyl 0 0 [gxl gyl 0 0]
- pop pop pop % sx sy [pnts] #pnts gxl gyl
- 4 -2 roll % sx sy gxl gyl [pnts] #pnts
- -1 add % sx sy gxl gyl [pnts] #pnts-1
- get % sx sy gxl gyl [gxh gyh 0 0]
- aload % sx sy gxl gyl gxh gyh 0 0 [gxh gyh 0 0]
- pop pop pop % sx sy gxl gyl gxh gyh
- 6 -1 roll % sy gxl gyl gxh gyh sx
- 3 -1 roll % sy gxl gyl gyh sx gxh
- 5 -1 roll % sy gyl gyh sx gxh gxl
- sub % sy gyl gyh sx delx
- div % sy gyl gyh Ax
- 4 1 roll % Ax sy gyl gyh
- exch sub % Ax sy dely
- div % Ax Ay
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a non-empty array of points to fit ([pnts]) and scale factors
-% for graphics->text (Ax and Ay), compute the limiting points.
-/Mlprun { % [pnts] Ax Ay Mlprun ctx wtx cgx wgx cty wty cgy wgy
- 2 copy % [pnts] Ax Ay Ax Ay
- 4 index % [pnts] Ax Ay Ax Ay [pnts]
- 0 get % [pnts] Ax Ay Ax Ay [first]
- dup % [pnts] Ax Ay Ax Ay [first] [first]
- 4 1 roll % [pnts] Ax Ay [first] Ax Ay [first]
- Mlprun1 % [pnts] Ax Ay [first] fx fy
- 3 copy % [pnts] Ax Ay [low] lx ly [high] hx hy
- 8 -2 roll % [pnts] [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay
- 9 -1 roll % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnts]
- { % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt]
- 3 copy % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt] Ax Ay [pnt]
- Mlprun1 % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt] px py
- 3 copy % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt] px py [pnt] px py
- 11 -3 roll % [low] lx ly Ax Ay [pnt] px py [pnt] px py [high] hx hy
- /gt Mlpminmax % [low] lx ly Ax Ay [pnt] px py [high] hx hy
- 8 3 roll % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt] px py
- 11 -3 roll % [high] hx hy Ax Ay [pnt] px py [low] lx ly
- /lt Mlpminmax % [high] hx hy Ax Ay [low] lx ly
- 8 3 roll % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay
- } forall % [low] lx ly [high] hx hy Ax Ay
- pop pop pop pop % [low] lx ly [high]
- 3 1 roll % [low] [high] lx ly
- pop pop % [low] [high]
- aload pop % [low] hgx hgy htx hty
- 5 -1 roll % hgx hgy htx hty [low]
- aload pop % hgx hgy htx hty lgx lgy ltx lty
- exch % hgx hgy htx hty lgx lgy lty ltx
- 6 -1 roll % hgx hgy hty lgx lgy lty ltx htx
- Mlprun2 % hgx hgy hty lgx lgy lty ctx wtx
- 8 2 roll % ctx wtx hgx hgy hty lgx lgy lty
- 4 -1 roll % ctx wtx hgx hgy lgx lgy lty hty
- Mlprun2 % ctx wtx hgx hgy lgx lgy cty wty
- 6 2 roll % ctx wtx cty wty hgx hgy lgx lgy
- 3 -1 roll % ctx wtx cty wty hgx lgx lgy hgy
- Mlprun2 % ctx wtx cty wty hgx lgx cgy wgy
- 4 2 roll % ctx wtx cty wty cgy wgy hgx lgx
- exch % ctx wtx cty wty cgy wgy lgx hgx
- Mlprun2 % ctx wtx cty wty cgy wgy cgx wgx
- 6 2 roll % ctx wtx cgx wgx cty wty cgy wgy
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given scale factors for graphics->text (Ax and Ay) and a point in the
-% [gx gy tx ty] form, return the text x and y coordinate that results.
-/Mlprun1 { % Ax Ay [gx gy tx ty] Mlprun1 rx ry
- aload pop % Ax Ay gx gy tx ty
- exch % Ax Ay gx gy ty tx
- 6 -1 roll % Ay gx gy ty tx Ax
- 5 -1 roll % Ay gy ty tx Ax gx
- mul add % Ay gy ty rx
- 4 -2 roll % ty rx Ay gy
- mul % ty rx Ay*gy
- 3 -1 roll % rx Ay*gy ty
- add % rx ry
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a low and high coordinate, compute the center and width.
-/Mlprun2 { % low high Mlprun2 center width
- 2 copy % low high low high
- add 2 div % low high (low+high)/2
- 3 1 roll % (low+high)/2 low high
- exch sub % (low+high)/2 high-low
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given two points stored as [gx gy tx ty] followed by the scaled
-% result (rx, ry), and a comparison function (lt or gt) leave the
-% point which is the minimum (or maximum) in each dimension.
-/Mlpminmax { % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp Mlpminmax [pnt] x y
- cvx % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp
- 2 index % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp r2x
- 6 index % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp r2x r1x
- 2 index % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp r2x r1x cmp
- exec % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp take2?
- { % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp
- 7 -3 roll % [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp [pnt1] r1x r1y
- 4 -1 roll % [pnt2] r2x r2y [pnt1] r1x r1y cmp
- } if % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp
- 1 index % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp r2y
- 5 index % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y cmp r2y r1y
- 3 -1 roll % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y r2y r1y cmp
- exec % [pnt1] r1x r1y [pnt2] r2x r2y take2y?
- { % [gx ? tx ?] rx ? [? gy ? ty] ? ry
- 4 1 roll % [gx ? tx ?] rx ry ? [? gy ? ty] ?
- pop % [gx ? tx ?] rx ry ? [? gy ? ty]
- 5 -1 roll % rx ry ? [? gy ? ty] [gx ? tx ?]
- aload % rx ry ? [? gy ? ty] gx ? tx ? [gx ? tx ?]
- pop pop % rx ry ? [? gy ? ty] gx ? tx
- 4 -1 roll % rx ry ? gx ? tx [? gy ? ty]
- aload pop % rx ry ? gx ? tx ? gy ? ty
- [ % rx ry ? gx ? tx ? gy ? ty mark
- 8 -2 roll % rx ry ? tx ? gy ? ty mark gx ?
- pop % rx ry ? tx ? gy ? ty mark gx
- 5 -2 roll % rx ry ? tx ? ty mark gx gy ?
- pop % rx ry ? tx ? ty mark gx gy
- 6 -2 roll % rx ry ? ty mark gx gy tx ?
- pop % rx ry ? ty mark gx gy tx
- 5 -1 roll % rx ry ? mark gx gy tx ty
- ] % rx ry ? [pnt]
- 4 1 roll % [pnt] rx ry ?
- pop % [pnt] rx ry
- }
- { % [gx gy tx ty] rx ry ? ? ?
- pop pop pop % [pnt] rx ry
- } ifelse % [pnt] rx ry
-} bind def
-
-
-% Given a size (s), graphics->text scale (A), text center (ct), text
-% width (wt), graphics center (cg) and graphics width (wg), compute
-% a new graphics->text scale (Anew) and offset (B) and whether or not
-% we are done.
-% Note, the mysterious .99999 is magic juju which is supposed to ward
-% off the possibility that floating point errors would cause this
-% routine to return the old A and yet claim not-done.
-/Mlp1 { % s A ct wt cg wg Mlp1 Anew B done?
- 5 index % s A ct wt cg wg s
- 3 index sub % s A ct wt cg wg s-wt
- 5 index % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt A
- 2 index mul % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt A*wg
- 1 index % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt A*wg s-wt
- le % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt fits?
- 1 index % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt fits? s-wt
- 0 le % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt fits? impossible?
- or % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done?
- dup % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? done?
- not % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? notdone?
- { % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? (not done case)
- 1 index % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? s-wt
- 3 index div % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? (s-wt)/wg
- .99999 mul % s A ct wg cg wg s-wt done? Anew
- 8 -1 roll % s ct wg cg wg s-wt done? Anew A
- pop % s ct wg cg wg s-wt done? Anew
- 7 1 roll % s Anew ct wg cg wg s-wt done?
- }
- if % s Anew ct wg cg wg s-wt done?
- 8 -1 roll % Anew ct wg cg wg s-wt done? s
- 2 div % Anew ct wg cg wg s-wt done? s/2
- 7 -2 roll % Anew cg wg s-wt done? s/2 ct wg
- pop sub % Anew cg wg s-wt done? s/2-ct
- 5 index % Anew cg wg s-wt done? s/2-ct Anew
- 6 -3 roll % Anew done? s/2-ct Anew cg wg s-wt
- pop pop % Anew done? s/2-ct Anew cg
- mul sub % Anew done? s/2-ct-Anew*cg
- exch % Anew B done?
-} bind def
-
-
-% The following are the workings of the tick, axes and plot labels.
-% NOTE a possible source of confusion is that for xticks ie tickmarks on
-% the x axis we keep y information and vice versa for yticks
-%
-% When Minner is found then
-%
-% assumes that box starts at zero on the left lower side
-%
-% 0) if outflag = 1 then intop = 0, inrht = 0 outflag = 0
-% 1) Save intop largest top of box
-% 2) Save inrht largest rht of box
-% 3) set inflag notifies that inner marks are present
-%
-% When Mouter is found then
-%
-% if inflag is set then
-% 1) get vecx and vecy off the stack (points in direcn to move)
-% 2) vecx < 1 xadrht = inrht*abs(vecx)
-% 3) vecx > 1 xadlft = inrht*abs(vecx)
-% 4) vecy < 1 yadtop = intop*abs(vecy)
-% 5) vecy > 1 yadbot = intop*abs(vecy)
-% 6) set outflag = 1
-% 7) clear inflag, inrht, intop
-% guaranteed to be zero if no inner is present??
-%
-%
-% These all have effects in Mrotsboxa and Mrotshowa
-% check inflag and if set
-%
-% 1) increase top of bbox by yadtop
-% 2) decrease bot of bbox by yadbot
-% 3) increase rht of bbox by xadrht
-% 4) increase lft of bbox by xadlft
-% 5) clear outflag, yadtop, yadbot,
-% xadrht, xadlft
-%
-%/
-
-/intop 0 def
-/inrht 0 def
-/inflag 0 def
-/outflag 0 def
-/xadrht 0 def
-/xadlft 0 def
-/yadtop 0 def
-/yadbot 0 def
-
-% This saves the top right corner of the bounding box as a side effect
-% This is to allow the adjustment of text placed with Mouter so that
-% it misses the Minner text. It is assumed that the ang is 0
-% in the same way it is assumed that the text of Mouter is 0 or 90
-%
-/Minner { % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang Minner [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang
- outflag % do a bit of tidying up if necessary
- 1
- eq
- {
- /outflag 0 def
- /intop 0 def
- /inrht 0 def
- } if
- 5 index % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang [(str)]
- gsave
- Mtmatrix setmatrix
- Mvboxa pop % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow ylow xhigh yhigh
- grestore
- 3 -1 roll % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow xhigh yhigh ylow
- pop % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow xhigh yhigh
- dup % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow xhigh yhigh yhigh
- intop % is intop smaller than yhigh ?
- gt
- {
- /intop % update if it is
- exch def
- }
- { pop } % pop if it is not
- ifelse % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow xhigh
- dup % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow xhigh xhigh
- inrht % is inrht smaller than xhigh
- gt
- {
- /inrht % update if it is
- exch def
- }
- { pop } % pop if it is no
- ifelse % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang xlow
- pop % [(str)] gx gy sx sy ang
- /inflag % set the inflag
- 1 def
-} bind def
-
-% This takes two number off the stack and uses them as a vector in graphics
-% coordinates which points in the direction in which the Mouter text is to move
-% it calculates the bouding box adjustments yadtop yadbot xadrht and xadlft
-% these are in Mboxout to adjust the bounding box to compensate.
-/Mouter { % vecx vecy Mouter ..
- /xadrht 0 def % reset everything
- /xadlft 0 def
- /yadtop 0 def
- /yadbot 0 def
- inflag % was there an inflag ?
- 1 eq
- {
- dup % vecx vecy vecy
- 0 lt
- {
- dup % vecx vecy vecy
- intop % vecx vecy vecy intop
- mul
- neg % vecx vecy -vecy*intop
- /yadtop % make into yadtop
- exch def % vecx vecy
- } if
- dup % vecx vecy vecy
- 0 gt
- {
- dup % vecx vecy vecy
- intop % vecx vecy vecy intop
- mul % vecx vecy vecy*intop
- /yadbot % make into yadbot
- exch def % vecx vecy
- }
- if
- pop % vecx
- dup % vecx vecx
- 0 lt
- {
- dup % vecx vecx
- inrht % vecx vecx inrht
- mul
- neg % vecx -vecx*inrht
- /xadrht % make into xadrht
- exch def % vecx
- } if
- dup % vecx vecx
- 0 gt
- {
- dup % vecx vecx
- inrht % vecx vecx inrht
- mul % vecx vecx*inrht
- /xadlft % make into xadlft
- exch def
- } if
- pop %
- /outflag 1 def % set outflag
- }
- { pop pop} %
- ifelse
- /inflag 0 def
- /inrht 0 def
- /intop 0 def
-} bind def
-
-%
-% This adjusts the bounding box to account for adjacent text
-% This allows the two text strings to avoid each other
-% current matrix is the text matrix
-/Mboxout { % tlx tly thx thy Mboxout new_tlx new_tly new_thx new_thy
- outflag % do nothing unless Minner was found
- 1
- eq
- {
- 4 -1
- roll % tly thx thy tlx
- xadlft
- leadjust
- add % tly thx thy tlx xadlft+lead
- sub % tly thx thy tlx_new
- 4 1 roll % tlx_new tly thx thy
- 3 -1
- roll % tlx_new thx thy tly
- yadbot % tlx_new thx thy tly yadbot
- leadjust % tlx_new thx thy tly yadbot lead
- add % tlx_new thx thy tly yadbot+lead
- sub % tlx_new thx thy tly_new
- 3 1
- roll % tlx_new tly_new thx thy
- exch % tlx_new tly_new thy thx
- xadrht % tlx_new tly_new thy thx xadrht
- leadjust % tlx_new tly_new thy thx xadrht lead
- add % tlx_new tly_new thy thx xadrht+lead
- add % tlx_new tly_new thy thx_new
- exch % tlx_new tly_new thx_new thy
- yadtop % tlx_new tly_new thx_new thy yadtop
- leadjust % tlx_new tly_new thx_new thy yadtop lead
- add % tlx_new tly_new thx_new thy yadtop+lead
- add % tlx_new tly_new thx_new thy_new
- /outflag 0 def % reset everything to 0
- /xadlft 0 def
- /yadbot 0 def
- /xadrht 0 def
- /yadtop 0 def
- } if
-} bind def
-
-
-/leadjust {
- (m) stringwidth pop
- .5 mul
-} bind def
-
-
-% The offsets sx and sy refer to the graphics coordinate system
-% thus they must be altered if a rotation has taken place.
-% We must also change the bounding box computations for Minner
-%
-/Mrotcheck { % sx sy ang Mrotcheck new_sx new_sy ang
- dup
- 90
- eq
- {
-%
-% Mouter only applies to strings which are either at 0 or 90
-% sort out the box adjust factors
-%
-% xadrht -> yadbot
-% xadlft -> yadtop
-% yadtop -> xadrht
-% yadbot -> xadlft
- yadbot
- /yadbot
- xadrht
- def
- /xadrht
- yadtop
- def
- /yadtop
- xadlft
- def
- /xadlft
- exch
- def
- }
- if
- dup % sx sy ang ang
- cos % sx sy ang Cos
- 1 index % sx sy ang Cos ang
- sin % sx sy ang Cos Sin
- Checkaux % new_sx sx sy ang
- dup % new_sx sx sy ang ang
- cos % new_sx sx sy ang Cos
- 1 index % new_sx sx sy ang Cos ang
- sin neg % new_sx sx sy ang Cos -Sin
- exch % new_sx sx sy ang -Sin Cos
- Checkaux % new_sx new_sy sx sy ang
- 3 1 roll % new_sx new_sy ang sx sy
- pop pop % new_sx new_sy ang
-} bind def
-
-%
-% Checkaux is an auxilliary function for Mrotcheck it multiplies a
-% row vector by a column vector
-%
-/Checkaux { % r1 r2 dumy c1 c2 Checkaux r1 r2 dumy r1*c1+r2*c2
- 4 index % r1 r2 dumy c1 c2 r1
- exch % r1 r2 dumy c1 r1 c2
- 4 index % r1 r2 dumy c1 r1 c2 r2
- mul % r1 r2 dumy c1 r1 c2*r2
- 3 1 roll % r1 r2 dumy c2*r2 c1 r1
- mul add % r1 r2 dumy c2*r2+c1*r1
- 4 1 roll % c2*r2+c1*r1 r1 r2 dumy
-} bind def
-
-%
-% Mboxrot converts the bounding box back from the rotated coordinate
-% system to the Mgmatrix system to compensate for a rotation
-% It has the opposite functionality of Mrotcheck
-% This is not the most neatest or most efficient implementation but it works
-%
-/Mboxrot { % tlx thx tly thy Mboxrot new_tlx new_thx new_tly new_thy
- Mrot
- 90 eq
- {
-% old tlx thx tly thy
-% new -thy -tly tlx thx
-%
- brotaux % tlx thx -thy -tly
- 4 2
- roll % -thy -tly tlx thx
- }
- if
- Mrot
- 180 eq
- {
-% old tlx thx tly thy
-% new -thx -tlx -thx -tly
-%
- 4 2
- roll % tly thy tlx thx
- brotaux % tly thy -thx -tlx
- 4 2
- roll % -thx -tlx tlx thy
- brotaux % -thx -tlx -thy -tly
- }
- if
- Mrot
- 270 eq
- {
-% old tlx thx tly thy
-% new tly thy -thx -tlx
-%
- 4 2
- roll % tly thy tlx thx
- brotaux % tly thy -thx -tlx
- }
- if
-} bind def
-
-%
-% auxilliary function negate and reverse
-/brotaux { % x y boxrotaux -y -x
- neg
- exch
- neg
-} bind def
-
-%
-% Mabsproc takes a measurement in the default user units and converts
-% it to the present units. This allows absolute thickness and dashing
-% to work. It works by using a {0, x} vector and using the RMS of the result.
-/Mabsproc { % abs thing Mabsproc
- 0
- matrix defaultmatrix
- dtransform idtransform
- dup mul exch
- dup mul
- add sqrt
-} bind def
-
-%
-% Mabswid allows the linewidth to be specified in absolute coordinates
-% It does this by recording the graphics transformation matrix at the
-% begining of the plot.
-% This will break if the scaling in the x and y directions is
-% different. This is the case if Mnodistort is false
-%
-/Mabswid { %abswid Mabswid
- Mabsproc
- setlinewidth
-} bind def
-
-% Mabsdash allows the dashing pattern to be specified in absolute coordinates
-% It does this by recording the graphics transformation matrix at the
-% begining of the plot.
-% This will break if the scaling in the x and y directions is
-% different. This is the case if Mnodistort is false
-%
-/Mabsdash { %[d1 d2 d3 .. ] off Mabsdash
- exch % off [d1 d2 d3 ..]
- [ % off [d1 d2 d3 ..]
- exch % off [ [d1 d2 d3 ..]
- {
- Mabsproc
- }
- forall
- ] % off [ fact*d1 fact*d2 fact*d3 .. ]
- exch % [ nd1 nd2 nd3 .. ] off
- setdash
-} bind def
-
-%MBeginOrig start coordinates in user coordinates
-/MBeginOrig { Momatrix concat} bind def
-
-%MEndOrig start coordinates in user coordinates
-/MEndOrig { Mgmatrix setmatrix} bind def
-
-/sampledsound where
-{ pop}
-{ /sampledsound { % str rate nsamp bs proc bool nchan
- exch
- pop % str rate nsamp bs proc nchan
- exch % str rate nsamp bs nchan proc
- 5 1 roll % str proc rate nsamp bs nchan
- mul
- 4 idiv % str proc rate nsamp bs*nchan/4
- mul % str proc rate nsamp*bs*nchan/4
- 2 idiv % str proc rate nbytes
- exch pop % str proc nbytes
- exch % str nbytes proc
- /Mtempproc exch def
- { Mtempproc pop}
- repeat
- } bind def
-} ifelse
-
-%
-% now simple conversion of cmykcolor to rgbcolor
-% subtract k and then take complements
-/setcmykcolor where
-{ pop}
-{ /setcmykcolor { % c m y k
- 4 1
- roll % k c m y
- [ % k c m y [
- 4 1
- roll % k [ c m y
- ] % k [ c m y ]
- {
- 1 index % k elem k
- sub % k elem-k
- 1
- sub neg % k 1-(elem-k)
- dup
- 0
- lt
- {
- pop
- 0
- }
- if
- dup
- 1
- gt
- {
- pop
- 1
- }
- if
- exch % 1-(elem-k) k
- } forall % r g b k
- pop
- setrgbcolor
-} bind def
-} ifelse
-
-/Mcharproc % max
-{
- currentfile
- (x)
- readhexstring
- pop % max val
- 0 get
- exch % val max
- div % nval
-} bind def
-
-/Mshadeproc % max ncols
-{
- dup % max ncols ncols
- 3 1
- roll % ncols max ncols
- { % ncols max
- dup % ncols max max
- Mcharproc % ncols max val
- 3 1
- roll % v1.. ncols max
- } repeat
- 1 eq
- {
- setgray
- }
- {
- 3 eq
- {
- setrgbcolor
- }
- {
- setcmykcolor
- } ifelse
- } ifelse
-} bind def
-
-/Mrectproc % x0 x1 y0 y1
-{
- 3 index % x0 x1 y0 y1 x0
- 2 index % x0 x1 y0 y1 x0 y0
- moveto % x0 x1 y0 y1
- 2 index % x0 x1 y0 y1 x1
- 3 -1
- roll % x0 x1 y1 x1 y0
- lineto % x0 x1 y1
- dup % x0 x1 y1 y1
- 3 1
- roll % x0 y1 x1 y1
- lineto % x0 y1
- lineto
- fill
-} bind def
-
-/Mcolorimage % nx ny depth matrix proc bool ncols
-{
- 7 1
- roll % ncols nx ny depth matrix proc bool
- pop
- pop
- matrix
- invertmatrix
- concat % ncols nx ny depth
- 2 exch exp % ncols nx ny 2^depth
- 1 sub % ncols nx ny max
- 3 1 roll % ncols max nx ny
- 1 1 % ncols max nx ny 1 1
- 2 index % ncols max nx ny 1 1 ny
- { % ncols max nx ny iy
- 1 1 % ncols max nx ny iy 1 1
- 4 index % ncols max nx ny iy 1 1 nx
- { % ncols max nx ny iy ix
- dup % ncols max nx ny iy ix ix
- 1 sub % ncols max nx ny iy ix x0
- exch % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1
- 2 index % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy
- dup % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy iy
- 1 sub % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy y0
- exch % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1
- 7 index % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1 max
- 9 index % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1 max ncols
- Mshadeproc % ncols max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1
- Mrectproc % max nx ny iy
- } for % x loop
- pop % max nx ny
- } for % y loop
- pop pop pop pop
-} bind def
-
-/Mimage % nx ny depth matrix proc
-{
- pop
- matrix
- invertmatrix
- concat % nx ny depth
- 2 exch exp % nx ny 2^depth
- 1 sub % nx ny max
- 3 1 roll % max nx ny
- 1 1 % max nx ny 1 1
- 2 index % max nx ny 1 1 ny
- { % max nx ny iy
- 1 1 % max nx ny iy 1 1
- 4 index % max nx ny iy 1 1 nx
- { % max nx ny iy ix
- dup % max nx ny iy ix ix
- 1 sub % max nx ny iy ix x0
- exch % max nx ny iy x0 x1
- 2 index % max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy
- dup % max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy iy
- 1 sub % max nx ny iy x0 x1 iy y0
- exch % max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1
- 7 index % max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1 max
- Mcharproc % max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1 val
- setgray % max nx ny iy x0 x1 y0 y1
- Mrectproc % max nx ny iy
- } for % x loop
- pop % max nx ny
- } for % y loop
- pop pop pop
-} bind def
-
-/Ma /Mabswid load def
-/a /arc load def
-/c /curveto load def
-/C /curveto load def
-/d /setdash load def
-/f /fill load def
-/F /fill load def
-/g /setgray load def
-/gr /grestore load def
-/gs /gsave load def
-/k /stroke load def
-/l /lineto load def
-/L /lineto load def
-/lw /setlinewidth load def
-/m /moveto load def
-/n /newpath load def
-/p /gsave load def
-/P /grestore load def
-/r /setrgbcolor load def
-/s /stroke load def
-/w /setlinewidth load def
-/beginmath /MBeginOrig load def
-/endmath /MEndOrig load def
-
-end
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/Makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index 79eee7f2b76..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/Makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-#
-# Makefile contributed by Steve Rumsby
-# and modified by Mark Phillips
-#
-
-# Where your TeX input files live
-TEXINPUTSDEST = /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs
-
-# Name of your Latex (for documentation)
-# Note: this must support NFSS in order for you to latex the manual;
-# otherwise print manual.ps
-LATEX = latex
-
-# Name of your DVI to PostScript converter, and
-# flags needed to process the manual
-DRIVER = dvips
-DRIVERFLAGS =
-
-# Where it keeps its support files
-PSDIR = /usr/local/lib/tex/dvips
-
-# System executable directory
-BINDIR = /u/geom/bin
-
-# Directory for Manual pages
-MANDIR = /u/geom/man/man1
-
-# Where perl lives
-PERL = /usr/local/bin/perl
-
-# Where you want to install the PostScript copy of the manual
-# ("manual.ps"). If you don't want to formally install this,
-# leave this definition blank.
-MANUALDIR = /u/geom/lib/geomsty
-
-# Pathname of directory where you want to install the auxiliary
-# programs geomfix and mathlabels. These are used by mathfig.
-AUXDIR=/u/geom/lib/geomsty
-
-# If your system doesn't support symbolic links you
-# could change this to "cp"
-LN = ln -s
-
-# Change this to "install" if you want
-CP = /bin/cp
-
-# You shouldn't have to change anything below here
-
-########################################################################
-
-SHELL=/bin/sh
-
-MANUALFILES = manual.ps
-
-all: mathlabels mathfig mathfig.1
-
-install: all
- $(CP) *.sty *.chg $(TEXINPUTSDEST)
- /bin/rm -f $(TEXINPUTSDEST)/driver.chg
- $(LN) $(TEXINPUTSDEST)/$(DRIVER).chg $(TEXINPUTSDEST)/driver.chg
- $(CP) mathfig $(BINDIR)
- $(CP) mathlabels geomfix $(AUXDIR)
- $(CP) math.pro illustrator.pro $(PSDIR)
- $(CP) mathfig.1 $(MANDIR)
- if [ "${MANUALDIR}" != "" ] ; then /bin/cp ${MANUALFILES} ${MANUALDIR} ; fi
-
-mathlabels: Makefile
- /bin/rm -f mathlabels
- (echo '#!$(PERL)'; sed 1d mathlabels.orig) > mathlabels
- chmod 755 mathlabels
-
-mathfig: Makefile mathfig.orig
- /bin/rm -f mathfig
- sed -e 's|geomfix=geomfix|geomfix=${AUXDIR}/geomfix|' \
- -e 's|mathlabels=mathlabels|mathlabels=${AUXDIR}/mathlabels|' \
- < mathfig.orig > mathfig
- chmod 755 mathfig
-
-mathfig.1: Makefile mathfig.1.orig
- /bin/rm -f mathfig.1
- sed -e 's|^geomfix$$|${AUXDIR}/geomfix|' \
- -e 's|^mathlabels$$|${AUXDIR}/mathlabels|' \
- < mathfig.1.orig > mathfig.1
-
-clean:
- /bin/rm -f *~ #*#
-
-distclean: clean
- /bin/rm -f *.dvi *.log *.lof *.aux *.bbl *.blg *.idx *.toc \
- mathlabels mathfig mathfig.1 geomsty.tar.Z geomsty.shar
-
-manual.dvi: manual.tex manual.bib
- ${LATEX} manual
- bibtex manual
- ${LATEX} manual
- ${LATEX} manual
-
-manual.ps: manual.dvi
- ${DRIVER} ${DRIVERFLAG} manual.dvi
-
-doc: manual.ps
-
-tar: distclean manual.ps
- gnutar hcvfZ geomsty.tar.Z -C .. `sed '1,/^\** *CONTENTS/ d' README`
-
-shar: distclean manual.ps
- (cd ..; shar -F -L95 -ogeomsty/geomsty.shar `sed '1,/^\** *CONTENTS/ d' README`)
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/PStorus.lab b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/PStorus.lab
deleted file mode 100644
index 89c8de75070..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/PStorus.lab
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-\setlabel{a}{48.600000}{4.162104}{0.000000}{1.000000}
-\setlabel{b}{4.162104}{48.600000}{1.000000}{0.000000}
-\setlabel{a'}{48.600000}{93.037896}{0.000000}{-1.000000}
-\setlabel{b'}{93.037896}{48.600000}{-1.000000}{0.000000}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/README b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/README
deleted file mode 100644
index a3846d5b11d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-This is the distribution directory for the "geom" style for LaTeX,
-which provides, among other things, the following features:
-
-- inclusion of PostScript figures, and of TeX text within figures
-- automatic creation of index entries and cross-references where appropriate
-- no need to worry about fragile commands in almost all situations
-- greater versatility in defining theorem-like environments
-- proofing aids such as version numbers and a running index
-
-The files listed below are part of the distribution. For details and
-installation instructions, print the file manual.ps and turn to
-Section 3. If the file does not print for any reason, look for the
-section Installation in manual.tex.
-
-All files in this distribution are
-
-Copyright 1992 Silvio Levy
-
-unless specified otherwise. You can make copies of these files and
-redistribute them for non-commercial purposes. If you make changes to
-any files (other than adapting the Makefile to your site), CHANGE THE
-NAMES of the changed files, and please let me know of any changes that
-may be of interest to a wider audience.
-
-This software is distributed without any warranty, express or implied.
-
-Silvio Levy
-The Geometry Center
-1300 South Second Street
-Minneapolis, MN 55454
-email: levy@geom.umn.edu
-
-************* CONTENTS OF DISTRIBUTION **************
-geomsty/Makefile
-geomsty/PStorus.lab
-geomsty/PStorus.ps
-geomsty/README
-geomsty/dvips.chg
-geomsty/geom.sty
-geomsty/geomar10.sty
-geomsty/geomar11.sty
-geomsty/geomar12.sty
-geomsty/geomart.sty
-geomsty/geombk10.sty
-geomsty/geombk11.sty
-geomsty/geombk12.sty
-geomsty/geombook.sty
-geomsty/geomenv.sty
-geomsty/geomeqns.sty
-geomsty/geomfig.sty
-geomsty/geomfix
-geomsty/geomfnt.sty
-geomsty/geomindx.sty
-geomsty/geompsfi.sty
-geomsty/illustrator.pro
-geomsty/manual.bib
-geomsty/manual.ps
-geomsty/manual.tex
-geomsty/math.pro
-geomsty/mathfig.orig
-geomsty/mathfig.1.orig
-geomsty/mathlabels.orig
-geomsty/multicol.sty
-geomsty/mainz/doc/doc.doc
-geomsty/mainz/doc/doc.bug
-geomsty/mainz/doc/newdoc.doc
-geomsty/mainz/doc/docstrip.doc
-geomsty/mainz/doc/readme.mz
-geomsty/mainz/doc/readme.mz0
-geomsty/mainz/doc/install.mz0
-geomsty/mainz/multicol/multicol.doc
-geomsty/mainz/multicol/multicol.bug
-geomsty/mainz/multicol/readme.mz
-geomsty/mainz/multicol/readme.mz1
-geomsty/mainz/multicol/install.mz1
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/driver.chg b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/driver.chg
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f32ef4fe1a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/driver.chg
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/dvips.chg,v 1.4 1993/01/13 15:50:36 levy Exp $
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% %
-% DRIVER-DEPENDENT DEFINITIONS %
-% %
-{\catcode`\p=12 \catcode`\t=12 \gdef\read@PT#1pt{#1}}
-\def\sp@topt#1#2{\psfig@dimen=#2sp \if\psfig@dimen=0pt \psfig@dimen=1sp\fi
- \edef#1{\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen}}
-\def\sp@tobp#1#2{\psfig@dimen=#2sp \if\psfig@dimen=0pt \psfig@dimen=1sp\fi
- \expandafter\@tempdima\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen bp
- \advance\psfig@dimen-.5 \@tempdima \multiply\psfig@dimen 2
- \edef#1{\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen}}
-\def\ps@init{}
-\def\ps@begin{\sp@tobp\@tempa\@p@sbbllx \sp@tobp\@tempb\@p@sbblly
- \sp@tobp\@tempc\@p@sbburx \sp@tobp\@tempd\@p@sbbury
- \sp@tobp\@tempe{\@p@swidth0} \sp@tobp\@tempf{\@p@sheight0}
- \special{PSfile=\@p@sfile\space llx=\@tempa\space lly=\@tempb\space
- urx=\@tempc\space ury=\@tempd\space rwi=\@tempe\space rhi=\@tempf}}
-% rwi is the total width, in tenths of the units used for the
-% other dimensions (this is dvips's brain damage)
-\def\ps@prolog{\ifmathematica\special{header=math.pro}\fi
- \ifillustrator\special{header=illustrator.pro}\fi}
-\def\ps@clip{} %
-\def\ps@include{} %
-\def\ps@postlog{} %
-\def\ps@end{} %
-% %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% $Log: dvips.chg,v $
-%Revision 1.4 1993/01/13 15:50:36 levy
-%expressed things in bp (correctly)
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1993/01/10 02:12:09 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/06/10 12:44:13 levy
-%mathematica and illustrator dependences
-%
-%Revision 1.10 91/11/27 16:45:26 levy
-%removed path name from math.pro
-%
-%Revision 1.9 91/01/01 15:21:13 levy
-%checked in with -k by dbae at 91.01.12.17.41.23.
-%
-%Revision 1.9 91/01/01 15:21:13 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.8 90/11/18 11:25:35 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.7 90/11/18 11:19:34 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-% Revision 1.6 90/11/18 11:03:06 levy
-% *** empty log message ***
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/dvips.chg b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/dvips.chg
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f32ef4fe1a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/dvips.chg
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/dvips.chg,v 1.4 1993/01/13 15:50:36 levy Exp $
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% %
-% DRIVER-DEPENDENT DEFINITIONS %
-% %
-{\catcode`\p=12 \catcode`\t=12 \gdef\read@PT#1pt{#1}}
-\def\sp@topt#1#2{\psfig@dimen=#2sp \if\psfig@dimen=0pt \psfig@dimen=1sp\fi
- \edef#1{\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen}}
-\def\sp@tobp#1#2{\psfig@dimen=#2sp \if\psfig@dimen=0pt \psfig@dimen=1sp\fi
- \expandafter\@tempdima\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen bp
- \advance\psfig@dimen-.5 \@tempdima \multiply\psfig@dimen 2
- \edef#1{\expandafter\read@PT \the\psfig@dimen}}
-\def\ps@init{}
-\def\ps@begin{\sp@tobp\@tempa\@p@sbbllx \sp@tobp\@tempb\@p@sbblly
- \sp@tobp\@tempc\@p@sbburx \sp@tobp\@tempd\@p@sbbury
- \sp@tobp\@tempe{\@p@swidth0} \sp@tobp\@tempf{\@p@sheight0}
- \special{PSfile=\@p@sfile\space llx=\@tempa\space lly=\@tempb\space
- urx=\@tempc\space ury=\@tempd\space rwi=\@tempe\space rhi=\@tempf}}
-% rwi is the total width, in tenths of the units used for the
-% other dimensions (this is dvips's brain damage)
-\def\ps@prolog{\ifmathematica\special{header=math.pro}\fi
- \ifillustrator\special{header=illustrator.pro}\fi}
-\def\ps@clip{} %
-\def\ps@include{} %
-\def\ps@postlog{} %
-\def\ps@end{} %
-% %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% $Log: dvips.chg,v $
-%Revision 1.4 1993/01/13 15:50:36 levy
-%expressed things in bp (correctly)
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1993/01/10 02:12:09 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/06/10 12:44:13 levy
-%mathematica and illustrator dependences
-%
-%Revision 1.10 91/11/27 16:45:26 levy
-%removed path name from math.pro
-%
-%Revision 1.9 91/01/01 15:21:13 levy
-%checked in with -k by dbae at 91.01.12.17.41.23.
-%
-%Revision 1.9 91/01/01 15:21:13 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.8 90/11/18 11:25:35 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.7 90/11/18 11:19:34 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-% Revision 1.6 90/11/18 11:03:06 levy
-% *** empty log message ***
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/geomfix b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/geomfix
deleted file mode 100644
index aff40c9bd90..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/geomsty/geomfix
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-#! /bin/sh
-#
-# This is geomfix, Copyright 1992 Silvio Levy
-# $Header: /a/tampa/h/tampa_a/fac/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geomfix,v 1.1 92/07/17 13:27:45 levy Exp $
-#
-# This shell file reads stdin (or any list of files) and adds a header
-# similar to the one added by psfix, but without any of the definitons.
-# It also abbreviates certain PostScript commands.
-
-# Defaults:
-lmargin=1.0 # default left margin: .5 inches
-rmargin=1.0 # default right margin: .5 inches
-bmargin=1.0 # default bottom margin: .5 inches
-tmargin=1.0 # default top margin: .5 inches
-width=8.5 # default page width: 8.5 inches
-height=11 # default page height: 11 inches
-transform='' # default transformation: identity
-nodistort=true # default no-stretching: no
-fixwid=false # default fixwid compensation
-fixdash=false # default fixdash compensation
-while :; do
- case $# in
- 0)
- break 2
- ;;
- esac
- case "$1" in
- -lmarg)
- shift
- lmargin=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -rmarg)
- shift
- rmargin=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -bmarg)
- shift
- bmargin=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -tmarg)
- shift
- tmargin=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -width)
- shift
- width=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -height)
- shift
- height=$1
- shift
- ;;
- -land)
- tmp=$width
- width=$height
- height=$tmp
- transform="90 rotate 0 Mheight neg translate"
- shift
- ;;
- -stretch)
- nodistort=false
- shift
- ;;
- -stringfix)
- fixwid=false
- shift
- ;;
- -dashfix)
- fixdash=false
- shift
- ;;
- -*)
- echo \
-'Usage: psfix [-lmarg inches] [-rmarg inches] [-bmarg inches] [-tmarg inches]
- [-land] [-stretch] [-width inches] [-height inches]
- [-stringfix] [-dashfix] [file...]' \
- >&2
- exit 1
- ;;
- *)
- break 2
- ;;
- esac
-done
-
-# Output header
-echo '%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0'
-# Compute bounding box
-(
-bc <<!
-$width * 72
-$height * 72
-!
-) | (
- read right
- read top
- echo "%%BoundingBox: 0 0 $right $top"
-)
-cat <<'!'
-%%Creator: Mathematica
-%%EndComments
-!
-
-# Output default values
-sed 's/[ ]*%.*$//
-s/^[ ]*//
-/^[ ]*$/d' <<!
-
-MyDict begin
-/Mlmarg $lmargin 72 mul def % left margin (points)
-/Mrmarg $rmargin 72 mul def % right margin (points)
-/Mbmarg $bmargin 72 mul def % top margin (points)
-/Mtmarg $tmargin 72 mul def % bottom margin (points)
-/Mwidth $width 72 mul def % total page width (points)
-/Mheight $height 72 mul def % total page height
-/Mtransform { $transform } bind def % possible page rotation
-/Mnodistort $nodistort def % no-stretching flag
-/Mfixwid $fixwid def % fixedwidth font only flag
-/Mfixdash $fixdash def % fixeddash flag
-/Mrot 0 def % angle at which text is rendered
-!
-
-# Some of the following abbrevs were used by me
-# prior to version 2.1 to save space.
-# In version 2.1 different abbrevs were introduced.
-# Only k causes a conflict.
-
-sed '/^%!$/d
-s/^0\.\([0-9]\)/.\1/
-s/\([ -]\)0\.\([0-9]\)/\1.\2/g
-s/\<k\>$/setcmykcolor/
-s/\<Mabswid\>$/Ma/g
-s/\<arc\>$/a/g
-s/\<curveto\>$/c/g
-s/\<setdash\>$/d/g
-s/\<fill\>$/f/g
-s/\<setgray\>$/g/g
-s/\<grestore\>$/gr/g
-s/\<gsave\>$/gs/g
-s/\<stroke\>$/k/g
-s/\<lineto\>$/l/g
-s/\<setlinewidth\>$/lw/g
-s/\<moveto\>$/m/g
-s/\<newpath\>$/n/g
-s/\<setrgbcolor\>$/r/g
-/^%%Creator:/d' $@
-
-echo end
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geom.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geom.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index fd2674c302c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geom.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,597 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /usr/home/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geom.sty,v 1.21 95/08/02 16:22:57 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-% NFSS2 mods 95/06/18 by J Rawnsley
-
-% Test for LaTeX2e
-\def\format@e{LaTeX2e}
-
-\ifx\fmtname\format@e
- \ProvidesPackage{geom}[95/06/18]
-\fi
-
-\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined
-\else
- \let\normalshape\normalfont
- \let\mediumseries\relax
-\fi
-
-%
-% This is the geom style master file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to latex.tex and lplain.tex.
-% LATEX VERSION 2.09 <14 January 1991>
-%
-\typeout{Reading Geometry Center style by Silvio Levy, $Revision: 1.21 $}
-\typeout{NFSS2 compatibility by J. Rawnsley, Maths Institute, Warwick 95/06/18}
-
-% Find out which style has been loaded (book or article).
-% If \chapter is undefined we assume the style is article, otherwise book.
-
-\def\@article{\@@article} \def\@book{\@@book}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{\def\@style{\@@article}}{\def\@style{\@@book}}
-
-% Load an appropriate file with changes to book.sty or article.sty.
-
-\ifx\@style\@book \input geombook.sty \else \input geomart.sty \fi
-
-% Load in other definitions.
-
-\input geomenv.sty % environments
-\input geomfig.sty % figures
-\input geomfnt.sty % new fonts
-\input geomindx.sty % indexing macros
-\ifx\fmtname\format@e
- %\usepackage{multicol} % two-column formatting
- \input multicol.sty % two-column formatting
-\else
- \input multicol.sty % two-column formatting
-\fi
-% ****************************************
-% * USEFUL HACKS *
-% ****************************************
-%
-% \@@warning and \@warning don't need the word ``LaTeX''.
-%
-\def\@@warning#1{\typeout{Warning: #1.}}
-
-% **********************************************
-% * SPACING / LINE AND PAGE BREAKING *
-% **********************************************
-
-% Avoid the lack of spacing after a list when the first item is run-in.
-
-\def\endtrivlist{\if@newlist\@noitemerr\fi
- \if@inlabel\indent\fi
- \ifhmode\unskip \par\fi
-% \if@noparlist \else
- \ifdim\lastskip >\z@ \@tempskipa\lastskip \vskip -\lastskip
- \advance\@tempskipa\parskip \advance\@tempskipa -\@outerparskip
- \vskip\@tempskipa
- \fi\@endparenv
-% \fi
-}
-\let\endcenter=\endtrivlist
-\let\endflushleft=\endtrivlist
-\let\endflushright=\endtrivlist
-\let\endverbatim=\endtrivlist
-\expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname =\endtrivlist
-
-% ****************************************
-% * FILE HANDLING *
-% ****************************************
-%
-% Proofing is true by default.
-%
-\newif\ifproofing\proofingtrue
-\def\include#1{\ifproofing\@include#1 \else\input{#1.tex}\fi}
-\def\noproofing{\noexpand\proofingfalse}
-\def\@proofingfalse{\proofingfalse}
-\def\checkproofing{\ifx\@partlist\@proofingfalse\proofingfalse\fi}
-\def\includeonly#1{\@partswtrue\edef\@partlist{#1}\checkproofing}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * CROSS-REFERENCING MACROS *
-% ****************************************
-
-\let\@xf\expandafter
-%
-% The main differences between these macros and LaTeX's are that keys
-% are not expanded, and the first field in the record's value contains
-% the type of object referred to. For example,
-% \newlabel{square torus in space}{{problem 1.1.1}{5}}
-% This information is read at the time the record is formed
-% from the \object@type. Expansion of the key is inhibited by storing
-% it into the token list \@key, with everything protected by \noexpand's.
-%
-\def\object@type{??}
-\def\setlabeltype#1{\edef\object@type{#1}}
-\newtoks\@key
-\def\set@key#1{{\aftergroup\@key\aftergroup{\sanitize#1\endsanity}}}
-
-%
-% These are the user-level macros:
-%
-% \fullref{...} expands to theorem~3.7
-% \Fullref{...} expands to Theorem~3.7
-% \ref{...} expands to 3.7
-% \pageref{...} expands to 377
-
-\def\fullref{\@ref{\@xf\@car}}
-\def\Fullref{\@ref{\@xf\@xf\@xf\cap@first\@xf\@car}}
-\def\pageref{\@ref{\@xf\@cdr}}
-\def\ref{\@ref{\@xf\@xf\@xf\discard@first\@xf\@car}}
-\def\reftype{\@ref{\@xf\@xf\@xf\discard@second\@xf\@car}}
-\def\Reftype{\@ref{\@xf\@xf\@xf\@xf\@xf\@xf\@xf\discard@second
- \@xf\@xf\@xf\cap@first\@xf\@car}}
-\def\cap@first#1{\uppercase{#1}}
-\def\discard@first#1~{}
-\def\discard@second#1~\preref{#1\@gobble}
-
-%
-% This is similar to \ref in LaTeX, but has two arguments: the second
-% is the key, which is not expanded; the first is an operator to be
-% applied to the value of the record.
-%
-\newtoks\@value
-\def\@ref#1{\@ifnextchar*{\@r@f{#1}}{\@r@f{#1}+}}
-\def\@r@f#1#2#3{\set@key{#3}\@ifundefined{r@\the\@key}%
- {{\bf ??}\@warning{Reference `\expand@key' %on page \thepage\space
- undefined}}%
- {\@value=\@xf\@xf\@xf{\csname r@\the\@key\endcsname}#1\the\@value\@nil\null}%
- \if#2*\refindex{#3} (#3)\else\refinvindex{#3}\fi}
-\def\expand@key{\@xf\empty\the\@key}
-
-\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\set@key{#2}\item[\@biblabel{#1}]\if@filesw
- \xdef\@gtempa{\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{\the\@key}{#1}}}
- \@gtempa\fi\ignorespaces}
-
-%
-% Like \label in LaTeX, but follows the conventions explained at the
-% top of this file. The \label* variant creates a more comprehensive
-% index entry.
-%
-\def\preref#1{#1}
-\def\label{\@ifnextchar*{\l@bel}{\l@bel+}}
-\def\l@bel#1#2{\set@key{#2}\@bsphack\if@filesw
- {\let\thepage\relax
- \xdef\@gtempa{\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{\the\@key}%
- {{\object@type\string~\string\preref{\@currentlabel}}%
- {\string\preref{\thepage}}}%
- }}}\@gtempa
- \if@nobreak \ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi\fi\@esphack
- \if#1*\labelindex{#2}\else\index{#2}\fi\ignorespaces}
-
-\def\newlabel{\bgroup\@sanitize\afterassignment\@readlabel\global\@key}
-\def\bibcite{\bgroup\@sanitize\afterassignment\@readbibcite\global\@key}
-\def\@readlabel{\egroup\r@adlabel r}
-\def\@readbibcite{\egroup\r@adlabel b}
-\def\r@adlabel#1#2{\@ifundefined{#1@\the\@key}{}%
- {\@warning{Label `\expand@key' multiply defined}}%
- \global\@namedef{#1@\the\@key}{#2}}
-
-%
-% sanitize
-%
-\def\citeseparator{,}
-\def\@citex[#1]#2{\set@key{#2}\if@filesw
- \xdef\@gtempa{\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\the\@key}}}\@gtempa\fi
- \let\@citea\@empty
- \@xf\@cite\@xf{\@xf\@for\@xf\@citeb\@xf:\@xf=\the\@key\do
- {\@citea\def\@citea{\citeseparator\penalty\@m\ }%
- \def\@tempa##1##2\@nil{\edef\@citeb{\if##1\space##2\else##1##2\fi}}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\@citeb\@nil
- \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{{\reset@font\bf ?}\@warning
- {Citation `\@citeb' %on page \thepage \space
- undefined}}%
- {\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}{#1}}
-
-%
-% add a preref
-%
-\def\@cite#1#2{\preref{[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]}}
-
-\def\nocite#1{\set@key{#1}\@bsphack\if@filesw
- \xdef\@gtempa{\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\the\@key}}}\@gtempa\fi
- \@esphack}
-
-\def\@testdef #1#2#3{\set@key{#2}\def\@tempa{#3}%
- \@xf\ifx\csname #1@\the\@key\endcsname\@tempa\else\@tempswatrue\fi}
-
-\def\\{\let\stoken= } \\
-\def\sanitize{\futurelet\next\sanswitch}
-\def\sanswitch{\let\@tempa\relax \ifx\next\endsanity \let\@tempa\endsanity
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\stoken\aftergroup\space\let\@tempa\eat
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\bgroup\aftergroup{\let\@tempa\eat
- \else\ifcat\noexpand\next\egroup\aftergroup}\let\@tempa\eat
- \else\let\@tempa\copytoken\fi\fi\fi\fi \@tempa}
-\def\eat{\afterassignment\sanitize \let\next= }
-\long\def\copytoken#1{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#1##\aftergroup\string\aftergroup\string##\aftergroup\string
- \else\ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\aftergroup\string
- \else\ifcat\noexpand#1\relax\aftergroup\str@ng \fi\fi\fi
- \aftergroup#1\sanitize}
-\def\endsanity\endsanity{}
-\def\str@ng#1{\string#1\expandafter\if@secondletter\string #1\next\nex}
-\def\if@secondletter#1#2#3\nex{\ifx #2\next\else\ifnum`#2<`A \else
- \ifnum`#2<`Z \space\else\ifnum`#2<`a \else\ifnum`#2<`z \space\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% Labels are automatically added to theorems, section headings and the
-% like if \autolabel is true.
-
-\newif\ifautolabel\autolabeltrue
-
-% ****************************************
-% * ENVIRONMENTS *
-% ****************************************
-
-\long\def\@writefile#1#2{\@ifundefined{tf@#1}{}{
-\edef\@tempa{\immediate\write\csname tf@#1\endcsname}
-{\aftergroup\@tempa\aftergroup{\sanitize #2\endsanity}}}}
-
-% **********************************************
-% * MATH ENVIRONMENTS *
-% **********************************************
-
-%% following RmS 91/09/29: \reset@font added.
-
-\def\@eqnnum{{\reset@font\rm (\theequation)}}
-
-%
-% set object type
-%
-\def\equation{$$ % $$ BRACE MATCHING HACK
- \def\object@type{equation}\refstepcounter{equation}}
-
-%% following RmS 92/01/10: put \hbox around \@eqnnum
-
-\def\endequation{\eqno \hbox{\@eqnnum}% $$ BRACE MATCHING HACK
-$$\global\@ignoretrue}
-
-\def\eqnarray{\def\object@type{equation}%
- \stepcounter{equation}\edef\@currentlabel{\theequation}%
-\global\@eqnswtrue\m@th
-\global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering\let\\\@eqncr
-$$\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup\@eqnsel\hskip\@centering
- $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$&\global\@eqcnt\@ne
- \hskip 2\arraycolsep \hfil${##}$\hfil
- &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip 2\arraycolsep $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil
- \tabskip\@centering&\llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr}
-\def\@eqncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\global\@eqpen\@M
- \@yeqncr}{\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@yeqncr}%
- \edef\@currentlabel{\theequation}}
-
-%
-% allow equations to be numbered with other environments
-%
-
-\def\equationwith#1{%
- \@xf\edef\@xf\c@equation\@xf{\csname c@#1\endcsname}%
- \@xf\let\@xf\theequation\csname the#1\endcsname
-}
-
-%
-% Bring back \eqalign from plain TeX (for less than full-width alignments)
-%
-\def\eqalign#1{\null\,\vcenter{\openup\jot\m@th
- \ialign{\strut\hfil$\displaystyle{##}$&$\displaystyle{{}##}$\hfil
- \crcr#1\crcr}}\,}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * THE LIST ENVIRONMENT *
-% ****************************************
-
-% make the \listparindent non-zero
-
-\def\list#1#2{\ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax \@toodeep
- \else \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne \fi
- \rightmargin \z@ \listparindent.8\parindent \itemindent\z@
- \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
- \def\@itemlabel{#1}\let\makelabel\@mklab \@nmbrlistfalse #2\relax
- \@trivlist
- \parskip\parsep \parindent\listparindent
- \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin
- \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin
- \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
- \ignorespaces}
-
-% for bibliography
-\def\@mklab#1{#1\hskip 0pt plus .0001fil\relax}
-
-% Use \unhbox instead of \box for labels like theorems etc.
-% Add normalshape
-% Removed a \penalty0 to avoid line ending with blank space
-%
-% to make part (a) of an enumerate that immediate follows a label
-% start on a fresh line, change the last line of \@item to:
-%
-%\def\@item[#1]{\if@noparitem \@donoparitem
-% ...
-% \hskip \labelsep}\vrule width 0pt \ignorespaces}
-%
-\def\@item[#1]{\if@noparitem \@donoparitem
- \else \if@inlabel \indent \par \fi
- \ifhmode \unskip\unskip \par \fi
- \if@newlist \if@nobreak \@nbitem \else
- \addpenalty\@beginparpenalty
- \addvspace\@topsep \addvspace{-\parskip}\fi
- \else \addpenalty\@itempenalty \addvspace\itemsep
- \fi
- \global\@inlabeltrue
-\fi
-\everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\global\@newlistfalse
- \if@inlabel\global\@inlabelfalse \hskip -\parindent \unhbox\@labels
-% \penalty\z@ \fi
- \fi
- \everypar{}}\global\@nobreakfalse
-\if@noitemarg \@noitemargfalse \if@nmbrlist \refstepcounter{\@listctr}\fi \fi
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\makelabel{#1}}%
-%\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\makelabel{\normalshape #1}}% this would kill \sc
-\global\setbox\@labels
- \hbox{\unhbox\@labels \hskip \itemindent
- \hskip -\labelwidth \hskip -\labelsep
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\labelwidth
- \unhbox\@tempboxa
- \else \hbox to\labelwidth {\makelabel{\normalshape #1}}\fi
- \hskip \labelsep}\ignorespaces}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * ITEMIZE AND ENUMERATE *
-% ****************************************
-
-% Save \@currentlabel to allow correct label in the cases like this:
-%
-% \begin{theorem}
-% \begin{equation}
-% \end{equation}
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \label
-%
-
-\def\enumerate{\ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
- \advance\@enumdepth \@ne
- \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\list
- {\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter
- {\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{\normalshape ##1}}}\fi
- \let\@@currentlabel\@currentlabel}
-
-% commented out Jan 11 93; had been added to version 1.14, but I have no
-% idea how it was supposed to work, or what unrobustness it was trying
-% to solve (see log). With this code, \@@currentlabel was never assigned.
-%
-% \let\@savecurrentlabel\@currentlabel}
-%
-%\@ifundefined{@@currentlabel}{\@currentlabel}{\@savecurrentlabel}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * THEOREM ENVIRONMENTS *
-% ****************************************
-
-% See geomenv.sty
-
-% *****************************************
-% * SECTIONING *
-% *****************************************
-
-% Allow up to \presection at bottom of page before new section
-% to encourage section to start on fresh page
-
-\newskip\presection \presection 0pt plus 10ex \relax
-
-\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{\if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
- \par \@tempskipa #4\relax
- \@afterindenttrue
- \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse\fi
- \advance\@tempskipa by\presection
- \if@nobreak \everypar{}\else
- \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{\@tempskipa}%
- \allowbreak\vskip -\presection \fi \@ifstar
- {\@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}{\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
-
-% Add a . after section number instead of skipping 1em
-% Mess with \addcontentsline
-% Automatic labels
-
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{\def\object@type{#1}%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\def\@svsec{}\def\@tempb{}%
- \else\refstepcounter{#1}\edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname. }%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}} \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}}%
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup #6\relax
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #7}%
- \ifautolabel\label*{#8}\fi
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname {#7}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #7}%
- \ifautolabel\label*{#8}\fi}\fi
- \@xsect{#5}}
-
-% Add automatic content line and label
-
-\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\def\@tempb{}%
- \else \def\@tempb{\numberline{}}\fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{s#1}}%
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup #6\relax
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3}{\interlinepenalty \@M #7\par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname s#1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \ifstarredcontents\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #7}\fi
- \ifautolabel\label*{#7}\fi
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax #7%
- \csname s#1mark\endcsname {#7}%
- \ifautolabel\label*{#7}\fi}\fi
- \@xsect{#5}}
-
-\newif\ifstarredcontents\starredcontentstrue
-\def\ssubsectionmark#1{}
-\def\ssubsubsectionmark#1{}
-\def\sparagraphmark#1{}
-\def\ssubparagraphmark#1{}
-
-% *****************************************
-% * TABLE OF CONTENTS, ETC. *
-% *****************************************
-
-% Don't expand macros when writing lines for the table of contents.
-
-\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{\if@filesw \begingroup
-\set@key{#3}%
-\let\label\@gobble \let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
- {\let\thepage\relax
-\xdef\@gtempa{\write \@auxout{\string\@writefile{#1}{\noexpand\string
- \noexpand\contentsline{#2}{\the\@key}{\thepage}}}}\@gtempa}
- \if@nobreak \ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi\endgroup\fi}
-
-\long\def\addtocontents#1#2{\if@filesw \begingroup
-\set@key{#2}%
-\let\label\@gobble \let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
-\edef\@tempa{\write \@auxout {\string\@writefile{#1}{\the\@key}}}\@tempa
- \if@nobreak \ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi\endgroup\fi}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * FLOATS *
-% ****************************************
-
-% Make marginal pars tiny and ragged right
-
-\long\def\@savemarbox#1#2{\global\setbox#1\vtop{\hsize\marginparwidth
- \@parboxrestore\marginparstyle #2}}
-
-\def\marginparstyle{\tiny\normalshape\mediumseries\raggedright}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * INITIAL DECLARATION COMMANDS *
-% ****************************************
-
-% Don't expand macros in marks.
-
-\newtoks\@mark
-\def\markboth#1#2{{\global\@mark={{#1}{#2}}{%
- \mark{\the\@mark}}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}}
-
-\def\markbothsame#1{{\global\@mark={{#1}{#1}}{%
- \mark{\the\@mark}}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}}
-
-\def\markright#1{{\expandafter\@markright\the\@mark
- {#1}\mark{\the\@mark}}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
-
-\def\@markright#1#2#3{\global\@mark{{#1}{#3}}}
-
-\@mark{{}{}}
-
-% ****************************************
-% * OUTPUT *
-% ****************************************
-
-% CHECK if this bug really has disappeared.
-% the two lines after ``here was the bug''
-% avoid disappearing \write's before a \marginpar
-% at the top of a page (SL 900302). The bug is exemplified by
-% \documentstyle{article}
-% \begin{document}
-% \label{foo}\marginpar{foo}
-% \end{document}
-%
-\def\@specialoutput{\ifnum\outputpenalty > -\@Mii
- \@doclearpage
- \else
- \ifnum \outputpenalty <-\@Miii
- \ifnum\outputpenalty<-\@MM \deadcycles\z@\fi
- \global\setbox\@holdpg\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
- \else % here was the bug
- \ifdim\ht\@cclv=\pagegoal\else
- \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa\fi
- \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
- \@pagedp\dp\@holdpg \@pageht\ht\@holdpg
- \unvbox\@holdpg
- \@next\@currbox\@currlist{\ifnum\count\@currbox >\z@
- \ifvoid\footins\else\advance\@pageht\ht\footins
- \advance\@pageht\skip\footins \advance\@pagedp\dp\footins
- \insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
- \@addtocurcol\else
- \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
- \@addmarginpar\fi}\@latexbug
- \ifnum \outputpenalty <\z@ \penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
- \fi\fi}
-
-% Avoid headers on blank pages
-\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
- \thispagestyle{plain}\hbox{}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% $Log: geom.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.21 95/08/02 16:22:57 levy
-%introduced cite separator
-%
-%Revision 1.20 95/07/18 18:19:57 levy
-%\normalshape migrated from \@item to \enumerate, so \sc will work w/
-%\description, say
-%
-%Revision 1.19 95/07/03 14:08:49 levy
-%NFSS2 changes by John Rawnsley
-%
-%Revision 1.19 95/07/03 14:07:58 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.17 93/08/04 10:00:53 levy
-%fixed problem with \ssectionmark (so running heads for Bibliography etc.
-%are correct).
-%
-%Revision 1.16 93/01/31 16:15:20 levy
-%created \marginparstyle
-%
-%Revision 1.16 93/01/12 01:50:02 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.15 1992/08/25 19:53:57 levy
-%fixed \@mklab (previous fix was nonsense)
-%
-%Revision 1.14 92/08/25 19:33:50 levy
-%@@currentlabel more robust
-%
-%Revision 1.13 92/07/31 09:50:26 levy
-%redefine \@mklab
-%
-%Revision 1.12 92/07/17 13:44:12 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.11 92/07/13 21:54:14 levy
-%further cleaned up the environments
-%
-%Revision 1.10 92/07/13 11:11:48 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.9 92/07/13 08:57:20 levy
-%changes to geomenv.sty
-%
-%Revision 1.8 1992/07/06 19:04:42 levy
-%sanitize \bibcite, \cite
-%
-%Revision 1.7 92/06/26 18:46:57 levy
-%\reftype
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/06/03 11:25:59 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/04/16 12:58:26 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/04/07 09:09:03 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1992/03/21 02:37:06 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1992/03/20 22:39:40 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/20 19:09:34 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar10.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar10.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 620e34957e5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar10.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geomar10.sty,v 1.5 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy Exp levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style art10 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to art10.sty of 22 Dec 87
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geomart10.sty $Revision: 1.5 $ (changes to art10.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt
- \abovedisplayskip 9pt plus2pt minus4pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus2.5pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 5pt plus2.5pt minus2.5pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 5pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt
- \abovedisplayskip 7.2pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%
- \belowdisplayshortskip 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \itemsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Following change commented out 940614 for the following imperfectly
-% understood reason. When the partopsep is NOT set here, it is zero
-% at the beginning of a run (even though defined to be 3 +1 -2 in
-% art10.sty). When it is set here, it is nonzero, and breaks the
-% footnotes on the first page of amsart.sty.
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +1 -2)
-
-%\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% mess with \addcontentsline; \chapheadsize instead of \Huge
-
-\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \refstepcounter{part} % THEN step part counter
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{part}} %
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\thepart % add toc line
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else % ELSE add unnumbered line
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi % FI
- {\centering
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \Large\bf Part \thepart % THEN Print 'Part' and number
- \par\nobreak % in \Large bold.
- \fi % FI
- \chapheadsize \bf %
- #2\markboth{}{}\par}
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-\def\@spart#1{{\centering
- \chapheadsize \bf
- #1\par} % Title.
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 8pt plus 3pt minus 4pt%
- \itemsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}
-
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geomar10.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.5 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.4 1994/06/14 21:48:58 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1994/06/14 21:48:37 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1993/12/21 05:16:58 levy
-%corrected \footnotesize
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/07/11 22:28:19 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:06 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/20 22:38:55 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar11.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar11.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 05e1601e7e7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar11.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geomar11.sty,v 1.2 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy Exp levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style art11 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to art11.sty of 22 Dec 87
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geomart11.sty $Revision: 1.2 $ (changes to art11.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
- \abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 6pt plus3pt minus3pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt
- \abovedisplayskip 8pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%
- \belowdisplayshortskip 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \itemsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Following change commented out 940614 for the following imperfectly
-% understood reason. When the partopsep is NOT set here, it is zero
-% at the beginning of a run (even though defined to be 3 +1 -2 in
-% art11.sty). When it is set here, it is nonzero, and breaks the
-% footnotes on the first page of amsart.sty.
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +1 -2)
-
-%\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% mess with \addcontentsline; \chapheadsize instead of \Huge
-
-\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \refstepcounter{part} % THEN step part counter
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{part}} %
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\thepart % add toc line
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else % ELSE add unnumbered line
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi % FI
- {\centering
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \Large\bf Part \thepart % THEN Print 'Part' and number
- \par\nobreak % in \Large bold.
- \fi % FI
- \chapheadsize \bf %
- #2\markboth{}{}\par}
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-\def\@spart#1{{\centering
- \chapheadsize \bf
- #1\par} % Title.
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt%
- \itemsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}
-
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geomar11.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.2 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:06 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/20 22:38:55 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar12.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar12.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 27f3c9a4f71..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomar12.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geomar12.sty,v 1.3 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy Exp levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style art12 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to art12.sty of 22 Dec 87
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geomart12.sty $Revision: 1.3 $ (changes to art12.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt
-\abovedisplayskip 11pt plus3pt minus6pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus3pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt
-\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
- \abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 6pt plus3pt minus3pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Following change commented out 940614 for the following imperfectly
-% understood reason. When the partopsep is NOT set here, it is zero
-% at the beginning of a run (even though defined to be 3 +2 -2 in
-% art10.sty). When it is set here, it is nonzero, and breaks the
-% footnotes on the first page of amsart.sty.
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +2 -2)
-
-%\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% mess with \addcontentsline; \chapheadsize instead of \Huge
-
-\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \refstepcounter{part} % THEN step part counter
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{part}} %
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\thepart % add toc line
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else % ELSE add unnumbered line
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi % FI
- {\centering
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-1\relax % IF secnumdepth > -1
- \Large\bf Part \thepart % THEN Print 'Part' and number
- \par\nobreak % in \Large bold.
- \fi % FI
- \chapheadsize \bf %
- #2\markboth{}{}\par}
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-\def\@spart#1{{\centering
- \chapheadsize \bf
- #1\par} % Title.
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 3ex % Space between title and text.
- \@afterheading % Routine called after part and
- } % section heading.
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \topsep 10pt plus 4pt minus 6pt%
- \itemsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus 1pt
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus \p@
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geomar12.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.3 1994/06/14 21:49:20 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1994/06/14 21:48:58 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:07 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/20 22:38:55 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomart.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomart.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cf2d58765c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomart.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /a/tampa/h/tampa_a/fac/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geomart.sty,v 1.7 94/07/22 09:55:30 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style article file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to article.sty of <16 Mar 88>.
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geomart.sty $Revision: 1.7 $ (changes to article.sty)}
-
-% Marginpars go on right side of page.
-
-\@mparswitchfalse
-
-% Input size-dependent information. \@ptsize.sty is defined in book.sty.
-
-\input geomar1\@ptsize.sty\relax
-
-% Layout parameters
-
-\tolerance 1000
-\clubpenalty 10000
-\widowpenalty 10000
-\hfuzz=.1pt
-
-% First two levels of enumerations are (a) and (i), respectively,
-% rather than 1. and (a).
-
-\let\@@currentlabel\relax %assign initial value
-
-\def\labelenumi{\theenumi}
-\def\theenumi{(\alph{enumi})}
-\def\p@enumi{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\labelenumii{\theenumii}
-\def\theenumii{(\roman{enumii})}
-\def\p@enumii{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\p@enumiii{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\p@enumiv{\@@currentlabel}
-
-% Less space around contents of \fbox (2pt instead of 3pt)
-
-\fboxsep = 2pt
-
-% No explicit \@mkboth needed in \tableofcontents
-% marks are automatically added by \section*
-
-\@ifundefined{contentsname}{\def\contentsname{Contents}}{}
-\def\tableofcontents{{\starredcontentsfalse\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}}
-
-% Contents line for part
-
-\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}
- \addvspace{2em plus 1pt} % space above part line
- \begingroup
- \def\\{\unskip\ \ignorespaces} % deal with \\ in chapter titles --SL
- \@tempdima 3em % width of box holding part number, used by
- \parindent \z@ %% \numberline
- \rightskip \@pnumwidth plus 3em % allow ragged right
- \parfillskip -\rightskip % when line wraps around --SL
- \hangindent 1.5em % hangindent is same as l@section below --SL
- {\bf % set line in boldface
- \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.
- #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par
- \nobreak % Never break after part entry
- \endgroup}
-
-% Treat contents entry for section same as the others
-
-\def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.3em}{3.2em}}
-\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{5.5em}{4.1em}}
-\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{9.6em}{5em}}
-\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{14.6em}{6em}}
-
-\def\l@ssection{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.3em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{5.5em}{0em}}
-\def\l@sparagraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{9.6em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{14.6em}{0em}}
-
-% No explicit \@mkboth needed in \listoffigures \listoftables \thebibliography
-% marks are automatically added by \section*
-
-\@ifundefined{listfigurename}{\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}}{}
-\@ifundefined{listtablename}{\def\listtablename{List of Tables}}{}
-\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
-\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
-
-% no indentation for figure contents line, since there are
-% no higher-level entries
-
-\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.3em}}
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-
-\@ifundefined{refname}{\def\refname{References}}{}
-\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}\list
- {[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}
- \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
-
-% Index uses two columns and smaller type.
-
-\@ifundefined{indexname}{\def\indexname{Index}}{}
-\def\theindex{\begingroup\section*{\indexname}\small
- \parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ plus .3pt\relax\let\item\@idxitem
- \begin{multicols}2}
-\def\endtheindex{\end{multicols}\endgroup}
-
-\def\glo#1{${}^{\dagger}$#1\index{\dag #1}}
-
-\@ifundefined{glossaryname}{\def\glossaryname{Glossary}}{}
-\newenvironment{theglossary}%
- {\begingroup\section*{\glossaryname}\small
- \begin{multicols}2}%
- {\end{multicols}\endgroup}
-\def\entry{\medbreak\@ifnextchar[{\entry@}{\entry@@}}
-\def\entry@@#1{\par\noindent{\bf #1.}\enspace\ignorespaces}
-\def\entry@[#1]#2{\par\noindent{\bf #2} #1.\enspace\ignorespaces}
-
-% Indentation in index is smaller (12pt instead of 40pt)
-
-\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 12pt}
-
-% Allow more of the page to be taken by figures.
-
-\def\bottomfraction{.7}
-\def\floatpagefraction{.7}
-
-% Captions at set with a width somewhat smaller than the main text width
-
-\newdimen\@captionmargin\@captionmargin=\parindent
-\newdimen\@captionwidth\@captionwidth=\hsize
-\advance\@captionwidth by -2\@captionmargin
-
-% left and right footers (normally set by RCS)
-
-\def\leftfoot{{}}
-\def\rightfoot{{}}
-
-% Definition of 'headings' page style.
-
-\def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\@oddfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\unskip\else\hfil\fi}
- \def\@evenfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\unskip\else\hfil\fi}
- \def\@evenhead{\footnotesize\rm\thepage\hfil\leftmark}% Left heading.
- \def\@oddhead{\footnotesize\rm\hbox{}\rightmark\hfil\thepage}%Right heading
- \def\ssectionmark##1{\markbothsame{##1}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{{% Expand the \ifnum, not the ##1
- \edef\@tempa{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ \thesection. \fi}%
- \expandafter \markbothsame \expandafter{\@tempa ##1}}}}
-
-\def\ps@plain{\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\@oddfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenhead{\hfil}\def\@oddhead{\hfil}}
-
-% Put the new \ps@headings into effect.
-
-\ps@headings
-
-% $Log: geomart.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.7 94/07/22 09:55:30 levy
-%\contentsname etc.
-%
-%Revision 1.6 1994/04/08 22:04:06 levy
-%initial value for @@currentlabel
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/07/17 13:44:17 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/07/13 21:54:23 levy
-%further cleaned up the environments
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/07/13 08:49:21 levy
-%theoremSt -> Theorem
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/06/10 12:38:44 levy
-%geomart12 -> geomar12
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:05 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1992/03/20 22:39:40 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1992/03/20 19:17:42 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk10.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk10.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index dba9e2b14ad..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk10.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geombk10.sty,v 1.2 1993/12/21 05:16:58 levy Exp levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style bk10 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to bk10.sty of <24 Nov 89>.
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geombk10.sty $Revision: 1.2 $ (changes to bk10.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt
- \abovedisplayskip 8pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%
- \belowdisplayshortskip 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \itemsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt
- \abovedisplayskip 7.2pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%
- \belowdisplayshortskip 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \itemsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +2 -2)
-
-\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% Replaced \Huge by \chapheadsize, added +10pt at end
-
-\def\@makechapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of text page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne % IF secnumdepth > -1 THEN
- \huge\bf \@chapapp{} \thechapter % Print 'Chapter' and number.
- \par
- \vskip 20pt \fi % Space between number and title.
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10 pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-\def\@makeschapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter* command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-% Don't skip page if proofing
-
-\def\chapter{\ifproofing\clearpage\else\cleardoublepage\fi
- \thispagestyle{chapter} % Page style of chapter page is 'plain'
- \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
- \@afterindentfalse % Suppresses indent in first paragraph. Change
- \secdef\@chapter\@schapter} % to \@afterindenttrue to have indent.
-
-% Define \object@type
-% stepcounter section so subsidiary counters (e.g. theorems) get reset
-% don't \typeout
-% mess with \addcontentsline
-% no need for \protect before \addvspace
-% automatic label
-
-\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne \def\object@type{chapter}
- \refstepcounter{section}\refstepcounter{chapter}
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}}%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\numberline{\thechapter}}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #1}%
- \else\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else \@makechapterhead{#2}\@afterheading \fi
- \ifautolabel\label*{#2}\fi}
-
-% add mark and table of contents line
-
-\def\@schapter#1{%
- \schaptermark{#1}
- \ifstarredcontents\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]
- \else \@makeschapterhead{#1}\@afterheading\fi}
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \topsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus \p@
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geombk10.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.2 1993/12/21 05:16:58 levy
-%corrected \footnotesize
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/07/11 22:35:33 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk11.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk11.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 2c3e403fb94..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk11.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geombk11.sty,v 1.1 1992/07/11 22:32:09 levy Exp levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style bk12 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to bk12.sty of <24 Nov 89>.
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geombk12.sty $Revision: 1.1 $ (changes to bk12.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
- \abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 6pt plus3pt minus3pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt
- \abovedisplayskip 8pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%
- \belowdisplayshortskip 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
- \itemsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +2 -2)
-
-\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% Replaced \Huge by \chapheadsize, added +10pt at end
-
-\def\@makechapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of text page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne % IF secnumdepth > -1 THEN
- \huge\bf \@chapapp{} \thechapter % Print 'Chapter' and number.
- \par
- \vskip 20pt \fi % Space between number and title.
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10 pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-\def\@makeschapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter* command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-% Don't skip page if proofing
-
-\def\chapter{\ifproofing\clearpage\else\cleardoublepage\fi
- \thispagestyle{chapter} % Page style of chapter page is 'plain'
- \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
- \@afterindentfalse % Suppresses indent in first paragraph. Change
- \secdef\@chapter\@schapter} % to \@afterindenttrue to have indent.
-
-% Define \object@type
-% stepcounter section so subsidiary counters (e.g. theorems) get reset
-% don't \typeout
-% mess with \addcontentsline
-% no need for \protect before \addvspace
-% automatic label
-
-\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne \def\object@type{chapter}
- \refstepcounter{section}\refstepcounter{chapter}
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}}%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\numberline{\thechapter}}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #1}%
- \else\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else \@makechapterhead{#2}\@afterheading \fi
- \ifautolabel\label*{#2}\fi}
-
-% add mark and table of contents line
-
-\def\@schapter#1{%
- \schaptermark{#1}
- \ifstarredcontents\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]
- \else \@makeschapterhead{#1}\@afterheading\fi}
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \topsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus \p@
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geombk11.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.1 1992/07/11 22:32:09 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk12.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk12.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 062484cb150..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombk12.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /a/tampa/h/tampa_a/fac/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geombk12.sty,v 1.3 92/06/18 16:56:17 levy Exp $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style bk12 file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to bk12.sty of <24 Nov 89>.
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geombk12.sty $Revision: 1.3 $ (changes to bk12.sty)}
-
-% make the \parsep 0pt
-
-\def\small{\@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt
- \abovedisplayskip 11pt plus3pt minus6pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5pt plus3.5pt minus3pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 4.5pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 9pt plus 3pt minus 5pt}}
-
-\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
- \abovedisplayskip 10pt plus2pt minus5pt
- \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip 6pt plus3pt minus3pt
- \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 0pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 0pt
- \topsep 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}}
-
-% Make chapter and section heads less huge
-
-\let\chapheadsize=\LARGE
-\let\huge=\Large
-\let\Large=\large
-
-% Increase the page size
-
-\textwidth 5.5in \oddsidemargin .6in \evensidemargin .4in
-
-\textheight = 44\baselineskip \advance\textheight by \topskip \topmargin -.25in
-
-% Increase the parindent
-
-\parindent 20pt
-
-% Extra vertical space, in addition to
-% \parskip and \topsep, added when user
-% leaves blank line before environment.
-% (Changed from 3 +2 -2)
-
-\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% Replaced \Huge by \chapheadsize, added +10pt at end
-
-\def\@makechapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of text page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne % IF secnumdepth > -1 THEN
- \huge\bf \@chapapp{} \thechapter % Print 'Chapter' and number.
- \par
- \vskip 20pt \fi % Space between number and title.
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10 pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-\def\@makeschapterhead#1{ % Heading for \chapter* command
- \vspace*{50pt} % Space at top of page.
- { \parindent 0pt \raggedright
- \chapheadsize \bf % Title.
- #1\par
- \nobreak % TeX penalty to prevent page break.
- \vskip 40pt plus 10pt % Space between title and text.
- } }
-
-% Don't skip page if proofing
-
-\def\chapter{\ifproofing\clearpage\else\cleardoublepage\fi
- \thispagestyle{chapter} % Page style of chapter page is 'plain'
- \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
- \@afterindentfalse % Suppresses indent in first paragraph. Change
- \secdef\@chapter\@schapter} % to \@afterindenttrue to have indent.
-
-% Define \object@type
-% stepcounter section so subsidiary counters (e.g. theorems) get reset
-% don't \typeout
-% mess with \addcontentsline
-% no need for \protect before \addvspace
-% automatic label
-
-\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne \def\object@type{chapter}
- \refstepcounter{section}\refstepcounter{chapter}
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}}%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\numberline{\thechapter}}%
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb #1}%
- \else\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else \@makechapterhead{#2}\@afterheading \fi
- \ifautolabel\label*{#2}\fi}
-
-% add mark and table of contents line
-
-\def\@schapter#1{%
- \schaptermark{#1}
- \ifstarredcontents\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
- \addtocontents{lof}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \addtocontents{lot}{\addvspace{10pt}}
- \if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]
- \else \@makeschapterhead{#1}\@afterheading\fi}
-
-% Normalize according to \parindent
-
-\leftmargini\parindent
-\listparindent .8\parindent
-\leftmarginii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiii .8\parindent
-\leftmarginiv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginv .8\parindent
-\leftmarginvi .8\parindent
-\leftmargin\leftmargini
-\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-
-% Make \parsep 0
-
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \topsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
- \itemsep 3pt plus 2pt minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 5pt plus 2.5pt minus \p@
- \itemsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@}
-
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \topsep 2.5pt plus \p@ minus \p@
- \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus \z@ minus \p@
- \itemsep \topsep}
-
-% $Log: geombk12.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.3 92/06/18 16:56:17 levy
-%footers in chapter openers
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/04/07 09:09:08 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/20 22:38:55 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombook.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombook.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index a3ca2320aee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geombook.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,249 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /a/tampa/h/tampa_a/fac/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/geombook.sty,v 1.13 94/07/22 09:55:37 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-%
-% This is the geom style book file, by Silvio Levy.
-% It contains modifications to book.sty of <24 Nov 89>.
-%
-% \typeout{Reading geombook.sty $Revision: 1.13 $ (changes to book.sty)}
-
-% Marginpars go on right side of page.
-
-\@mparswitchfalse
-
-% Input size-dependent information. \@ptsize.sty is defined in book.sty.
-
-\input geombk1\@ptsize.sty\relax
-
-% Layout parameters
-
-\tolerance 1000
-\clubpenalty 10000
-\widowpenalty 10000
-\hfuzz=.1pt
-
-% syntatic sugar for \includeonly
-% \chap1{34} expands to chap1/1.3,chap1/1.4
-
-\def\chap#1#2{\ch@p#1#2!}
-\def\ch@p#1#2{\if#2!\else chap#1/#1.#2,\expandafter\ch@p\expandafter#1\fi}
-
-% First two levels of enumerations are (a) and (i), respectively,
-% rather than 1. and (a).
-
-\let\@@currentlabel\relax %assign initial value
-
-\def\labelenumi{\theenumi}
-\def\theenumi{(\alph{enumi})}
-\def\p@enumi{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\labelenumii{\theenumii}
-\def\theenumii{(\roman{enumii})}
-\def\p@enumii{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\p@enumiii{\@@currentlabel}
-
-\def\p@enumiv{\@@currentlabel}
-
-% Less space around contents of \fbox (2pt instead of 3pt)
-
-\fboxsep = 2pt
-
-% mess with \addcontentsline; \chapheadsize instead of \Huge
-
-\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax % IF secnumdepth > -2
- \refstepcounter{part} % THEN step part counter
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{part}} %
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\thepart % add toc line
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else % ELSE add unnumbered line
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi % FI
- \markboth{}{}
- {\centering
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax % IF secnumdepth > -2
- \huge\bf Part \thepart % THEN Print 'Part' and number
- \par % in \huge bold.
- \vskip 20pt \fi % Add space before title.
- \chapheadsize \bf % FI
- #2\par}\@endpart}
-
-\def\@spart#1{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax % IF secnumdepth > -2
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{toc}{spart}} %
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{#1}\else % ELSE add unnumbered line
- \addcontentsline{toc}{spart}{#1}\fi % FI
- {\centering \chapheadsize \bf #1\par}\@endpart}
-
-% No explicit \@mkboth needed in \tableofcontents
-% marks are automatically added by \chapter*
-
-\@ifundefined{contentsname}{\def\contentsname{Contents}}{}
-\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi{\starredcontentsfalse\chapter*{\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
-
-% Contents line for chapter
-
-\def\l@chapter#1#2{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}
- \vskip 1.0em plus 1pt % space above chapter line
- \@tempdima 1.5em % width of box holding chapter number
- \begingroup
- \def\\{\unskip\ \ignorespaces} % deal with \\ in chapter titles --SL
- \hyphenpenalty10000 % prohibit hyphenation --SL
- \parindent \z@
- \rightskip \@pnumwidth plus 3em % allow ragged right
- \parfillskip -\rightskip % when line wraps around --SL
- \hangindent 1.5em % hangindent is same as l@section below --SL
- \bf % Boldface.
- \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.
- \advance\leftskip\@tempdima %% added 5 Feb 88 to conform to
- \hskip -\leftskip %% 25 Jan 88 change to \numberline
- #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty %% added 24 May 89 as suggested by J. Leichter
- \endgroup}
-
-% Contents line for part is the same as for chapter
-
-\let\l@part\l@chapter
-\let\l@spart\l@chapter
-
-\let\l@schapter\l@chapter
-\def\l@ssection{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{0em}}
-\def\l@sparagraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{0em}}
-\def\l@ssubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{0em}}
-
-% No explicit \@mkboth needed in \listoffigures \listoftables \thebibliography
-% marks are automatically added by \chapter*
-
-\@ifundefined{listfigurename}{\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}}{}
-\@ifundefined{listtablename}{\def\listtablename{List of Tables}}{}
-\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}\if@restonecol
- \twocolumn\fi}
-
-\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi\chapter*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}\if@restonecol
- \twocolumn\fi}
-
-% no indentation for figure contents line, since there are
-% no higher-level entries
-
-\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.3em}}
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-
-\@ifundefined{bibname}{\def\bibname{Bibliography}}{}
-\def\thebibliography#1{\chapter*{\bibname}\list
- {[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}\leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}
- \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
-
-% Index uses two columns and smaller type.
-
-\@ifundefined{indexname}{\def\indexname{Index}}{}
-\def\theindex{\begingroup\chapter*{\indexname}\small
- \parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ plus .3pt\relax\let\item\@idxitem
- \begin{multicols}2}
-\def\endtheindex{\end{multicols}\endgroup}
-
-\def\glo#1{${}^{\dagger}$#1\index{\dag #1}}
-
-\@ifundefined{glossaryname}{\def\glossaryname{Glossary}}{}
-\newenvironment{theglossary}%
- {\begingroup\chapter*{\glossaryname}\small
- \begin{multicols}2}%
- {\end{multicols}\endgroup}
-\def\entry{\medbreak\@ifnextchar[{\entry@}{\entry@@}}
-\def\entry@@#1{\par\noindent{\bf #1.}\enspace\ignorespaces}
-\def\entry@[#1]#2{\par\noindent{\bf #2} #1.\enspace\ignorespaces}
-
-% Indentation in index is smaller (12pt instead of 40pt)
-
-\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 12pt}
-
-% Allow more of the page to be taken by figures.
-
-\def\bottomfraction{.7}
-\def\floatpagefraction{.7}
-
-% Captions at set with a width somewhat smaller than the main text width
-
-\newdimen\@captionmargin\@captionmargin=\parindent
-\newdimen\@captionwidth %not set here because depends on hsize
-
-% left and right footers (normally set by RCS)
-
-\def\leftfoot{{}}
-\def\rightfoot{{}}
-
-% Definition of 'headings' page style.
-
-\def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\@oddfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenhead{\footnotesize\rm\thepage\hfil\leftmark}% Left heading.
- \def\@oddhead{\footnotesize\rm\hbox{}\rightmark\hfil\thepage}%Right heading
- \def\chaptermark##1{{% Expand the \ifnum, not the ##1
- \edef\@tempa{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \fi}%
- \expandafter \markboth \expandafter{\@tempa ##1}{}}}%
- \def\schaptermark##1{\markboth {##1}{##1}}%
- \def\ssectionmark##1{\markbothsame{##1}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{{% Expand the \ifnum, not the ##1
- \edef\@tempa{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ \thesection. \fi}%
- \expandafter \markright \expandafter{\@tempa ##1}}}}
-
-% footline in \ps@plain and \ps@chapter gets no page number
-
-\def\ps@chapter{\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\@oddfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\ifproofing\leftfoot\hfil\rightfoot\else\hfil\fi}%
- \def\@evenhead{\hfil}\def\@oddhead{\hfil}}
-
-\def\ps@plain{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \def\@oddhead{}\def\@oddfoot{}%
- \def\@evenhead{}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
-
-% Put the new \ps@headings into effect.
-
-\ps@headings
-
-% $Log: geombook.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.13 94/07/22 09:55:37 levy
-%\contentsname etc.
-%
-%Revision 1.12 1994/05/11 17:07:26 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.11 1994/05/08 06:05:01 levy
-%schapter etc.
-%
-%Revision 1.10 1994/04/27 07:15:50 levy
-%ssectionmark
-%
-%Revision 1.9 1994/04/08 22:04:06 levy
-%initial value for @@currentlabel
-%
-%Revision 1.8 92/07/17 13:44:19 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.7 92/07/13 21:54:25 levy
-%further cleaned up the environments
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/07/13 08:46:31 levy
-%theoremSt -> Theorem
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/06/18 16:55:56 levy
-%footers in chapter openers
-%caption width error
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/04/07 09:09:09 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.3 1992/03/20 22:39:40 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1992/03/20 19:17:42 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomenv.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomenv.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 338ebc4b910..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomenv.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /usr/home/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geomenv.sty,v 1.15 95/12/13 20:32:50 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-\@ifundefined{@@newtheorem}{}{\endinput}
-
-%
-% \newtheorem is modified so as to accept a (first) optional argument.
-% If this is present, the new theorem type ``foo'' will spawn an inner
-% environment ``foo@''. The optional argument contains two
-% brace-delimited token sequences, be inserted before and after the inner
-% environment starts.
-%
-\def\newtheorem{\@ifnextchar[{\@newtheorem}{\@newtheorem[{}{}]}}%]
-
-\long\def\@newtheorem[#1]{\@@newtheorem#1}
-
-\long\def\@@newtheorem#1#2#3{%
- \newenvironment{#3}%
- {\def\object@type{#3}#1\@ifnextchar[{\@enva{#3}{#2}}{\@envb{#3}{#2}}}%]
- {\end{#3@}}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\@othm{#3@}}{\@nnthm{#3}}%]
-}
-
-\def\@nnthm#1#2{%
-\@ifnextchar[{\@xnnthm{#1}{#2}}{\@ynnthm{#1}{#2}}}
-
-\def\unnumbered#1{\expandafter\let\csname the#1\endcsname\relax}
-
-\def\@xnnthm#1#2[#3]{\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}%
-\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\expandafter\noexpand
- \csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep \@thmcounter{#1}}%
-\global\@namedef{#1@}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}\global\@namedef{end#1@}{\@endtheorem}}
-
-\def\@ynnthm#1#2{\@definecounter{#1}%
-\expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%
-\global\@namedef{#1@}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}\global\@namedef{end#1@}{\@endtheorem}}
-
-\def\@enva#1#2[#3]{\begin{#1@}[#3]#2}
-\def\@envb#1#2{\begin{#1@}#2}
-
-%
-% Avoid indentation after end of theorem-like environment.
-%
-
-\def\end#1{\csname end#1\endcsname\@checkend{#1}%
- \expandafter\endgroup \if@endpe \@doendpe \@restorepar \fi
- \if@ignore \global\@ignorefalse \ignorespaces\fi}
-
-%
-% \theoremintro allows the user to choose how the theorem take is
-% going to look like.
-%
-
-\def\theoremintro#1{\normalshape\bf#1. }
-%
-% cannot use \@ifempty for this test because #2 typically looks like
-% \csname thetheorem\csname, and \thetheorem has been \let to \relax.
-%
-\def\thrmintro#1#2{#1%
- \def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa#2% This gives \thetheorem
- \ifx\@tempa\relax\else{ }\fi\fi#2}
-
-\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep
- \theoremintro{\thrmintro{#1}{#2}}\hskip-\labelsep]}
-
-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist\item[\hskip \labelsep
- \theoremintro{\thrmintro{#1}{#2} (#3)}\hskip-\labelsep]\ifautolabel\label*{#3}\fi}
-
-%
-% \specialdigits causes digits and punctuation to become active
-% and print in roman type. \regulardigits cancels that.
-%
-
-\def\dowith#1{\let\@tempa#1%
- \@tempa,\@tempa.\@tempa:\@tempa;\@tempa(\@tempa)\@tempa!\@tempa?%
- \@tempa0\@tempa1\@tempa2\@tempa3\@tempa4%
- \@tempa5\@tempa6\@tempa7\@tempa8\@tempa9}
-%
-\def\makeactive#1{\catcode`#1=13}
-\def\makeother#1{\catcode\expandafter`\noexpand#1=12}
-\def\makechoice#1{\edef#1{%
- \noexpand\ifmmode\string#1%
- \noexpand\else\noexpand\ifhmode\/\noexpand\fi%
- {\noexpand\normalshape\string#1}\noexpand\fi}}
-%
-\def\regulardigits{\dowith\makeother}
-
-{\dowith\makeactive
-\gdef\specialdigits{%
-\dowith\makeactive
-\let\@tempa\makechoice
- \@tempa,\@tempa.\@tempa:\@tempa;\@tempa(\@tempa)\@tempa!\@tempa?%
- \@tempa0\@tempa1\@tempa2\@tempa3\@tempa4%
- \@tempa5\@tempa6\@tempa7\@tempa8\@tempa9}%
-}
-
-% The proof environment takes an optional argument, which defaults
-% to \prooftag (which should be set by theorem-like environments).
-% This argument is stored in \provedbox (after being passed to
-% \provedboxcontents), to be printed in the ``proved box'' at
-% the end of the proof. It is also printed at the beginning of proof,
-% after being passed to \proofintro.
-
-% If the proof
-% ends with a displayed formula, it is recommented that the proved box
-% be placed next to the formula (as if it were a tag). This is done
-% by inserting \proved before the closing $$. In even more difficult
-% cases (e.g., if the formula already has a tag, or is part of a
-% multi-line display), plop \box\provedbox where we want the box to be.
-
-\def\prooftag{}
-\def\setprooftag{\xdef\prooftag{\@currentlabel}}
-
-\def\proof{}
-\renewenvironment{proof}
- {\trivlist\item[]\@ifnextchar[{\pro@f}{\pro@f[\prooftag]}}%]
- {\ifvoid\provedbox\else\hproved\fi\endtrivlist}
-
-% the next few lines, parallel to the Theorem setup, don't work for
-% two reasons: \provedbox is set within a group and so disappears, and
-% the nextchar seen by processproof is always \hskip.
-%\newenvironment{proof}
-% {\trivlist\item[\hskip\labelsep\process@proof\hskip-\labelsep]}
-% {\ifvoid\provedbox\else\hproved\fi\endtrivlist}
-%\def\process@proof{\@ifnextchar[{\pro@f}{\pro@f[\prooftag]}}%]
-
-\def\pro@f[#1]{\setbox\provedbox\hbox{\provedboxcontents{#1}}\proofintro{#1}}
-
-\def\proofintro#1{\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{#1}%
- {\it Proof\ifx\@tempa\empty\else\ of #1\fi. }\ignorespaces}
-
-\def\provedboxcontents#1{\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{#1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty$\square$\else\fbox{\small#1}\fi}
-
-\newbox\provedbox
-
-\def\proved{\ifmmode\eqno{\box\provedbox}\else\hproved\fi}
-
-\def\hproved{\unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip.5em\hbox{}\nobreak\hfil
- \box\provedbox{\parfillskip=0pt\finalhyphendemerits=0\par}}
-
-% $Log: geomenv.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.15 95/12/13 20:32:50 levy
-%make {proof} a redefinition instead of a definition
-%
-%Revision 1.14 95/07/22 13:32:31 levy
-%put space after period in \theoremintro
-%(while at the same time removing the \labelsep)
-%
-%Revision 1.13 93/08/18 08:35:24 levy
-%> eliminated space for \newtheorem{justnumber}{}
-%added definition of \unnumbered
-%
-%Revision 1.12 1993/03/16 23:55:14 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.11 93/03/07 23:08:41 levy
-%removed a repeated invocation of \theoremintro in \opargbegintheorem
-%
-%Revision 1.10 1993/01/10 20:57:03 levy
-%comparison in \proofintro should have \edef, not \def
-%
-%Revision 1.9 1993/01/10 17:11:12 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.8 92/10/01 15:31:59 levy
-%fixed space in "Theorem ."
-%
-%Revision 1.7 92/07/17 13:44:21 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/07/13 21:54:27 levy
-%further cleaned up the environments
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/07/13 11:12:10 levy
-%big change (abolished MakeStEnv)
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/06/15 19:15:35 levy
-%fixed disappearing punctuation in fancy italics
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/06/03 11:25:24 levy
-%active punctuation
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/04/07 09:08:56 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 1992/03/21 02:42:28 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomeqns.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomeqns.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 95e39630285..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomeqns.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geomeqns.sty,v 1.6 95/07/01 02:23:17 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-% format equation numbers like subsection numbers
-
-\def\@eqnnum{\hbox{\normalshape\bf \theequation.}}
-
-% set equations on left side
-
-\def\equation{$$ % $$ BRACE MATCHING HACK
- \def\object@type{equation}\refstepcounter{equation}}
-\def\endequation{\leqno \@eqnnum % $$ BRACE MATCHING HACK
- $$\global\@ignoretrue}
-
-\def\eqnarray{\def\object@type{equation}\stepcounter{equation}%
- \edef\@currentlabel{\theequation}
- \global\@eqnswtrue\global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering\let\\=\@eqncr
- $$\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup\@eqnsel\hskip\@centering % $$BRACE MATCHING
- $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$&\global\@eqcnt\@ne\hfil${}##{}$\hfil
- &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil
- \tabskip\@centering&\llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr}
-\def\endeqnarray{\@@eqncr\egroup
- \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne$$\global\@ignoretrue}
-\def\@@eqncr{\let\@tempa\relax
- \ifcase\@eqcnt \def\@tempa{& & &}\or \def\@tempa{& &}
- \else \def\@tempa{&}\fi
- \@tempa
- \if@eqnsw\hbox to .01pt{}\rlap{\rm \hskip -\displaywidth\@eqnnum}%
- \stepcounter{equation}\fi
- \global\@eqnswtrue\global\@eqcnt\z@\cr}
-\def\@eqncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\global\@eqpen\@M
- \@yeqncr}{\global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@yeqncr}%
- \edef\@currentlabel{\theequation }}
-
-% $Log: geomeqns.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.6 95/07/01 02:23:17 levy
-%fixed currentlabel inside eqnarray
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/07/13 21:54:29 levy
-%further cleaned up the environments
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/07/13 08:46:04 levy
-%theoremSt -> Theorem
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/04/02 09:08:39 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1992/03/20 19:17:42 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfig.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfig.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d2753a4df3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfig.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /u/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geomfig.sty,v 1.10 95/07/20 13:42:16 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-
-\@ifundefined{multifig}{}{\endinput}
-\input geompsfi.sty
-
-% set \object@type
-
-\def\@xfloat#1[#2]{\ifhmode \@bsphack\@floatpenalty -\@Mii\else
- \@floatpenalty-\@Miii\fi\def\@captype{#1}\ifinner
- \@parmoderr\@floatpenalty\z@
- \else\@next\@currbox\@freelist{\@tempcnta\csname ftype@#1\endcsname
- \multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii\advance\@tempcnta\sixt@@n
- \@tfor \@tempa :=#2\do
- {\if\@tempa h\advance\@tempcnta \@ne\fi
- \if\@tempa t\advance\@tempcnta \tw@\fi
- \if\@tempa b\advance\@tempcnta 4\relax\fi
- \if\@tempa p\advance\@tempcnta 8\relax\fi
- }\global\count\@currbox\@tempcnta}\@fltovf\fi
- \def\object@type{#1}%
- \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox\bgroup
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore}
-
-%
-% Higher-level environments for figures
-%
-
-\newenvironment{Table}{\@ifnextchar[%]
- {\@Float{table}}{\@Float{table}[htbp]}}{\end@Float{table}}
-\newenvironment{Figure}{\@ifnextchar[%]
- {\@Float{figure}}{\@Float{figure}[htbp]}}{\end@Float{figure}}
-%
-% #1 = type #2 = placement #3 = label #4 = title #5 = caption
-%
-
-\def\@Float#1[#2]#3#4#5{%
- \begin{#1}[#2]%
- \def\the@label{#3}%
- \def\the@title{#4}%
- \def\the@caption{#5}%
-}
-
-\def\end@Float#1{%
- \expandafter\caption\expandafter[\the@title]{%
- {\bf\the@title\ifx\the@caption\empty\else\ifx\the@title\empty\else. \fi\fi}%
- \ignorespaces\the@caption}%
- \expandafter\label\expandafter*\expandafter{\the@label}%
- \end{#1}}
-
-\def\masterpicpath{} % Needs redefining -- may need change in catcodes
-
-%
-% Definitions for figures
-%
-% Driver will look for figure in file .../chap3/2 (for book) or .../2 (art)
-%
-\ifx\@style\@book
-\def\picpath{\masterpicpath chap\thechapter/\arabic{section}/}
-\else
-\def\picpath{\masterpicpath\thesection/}
-\fi
-%
-% User macros:
-% \fig, \doublefig, \triplefig
-% followed by <optional placement>{filename}{title}{caption}
-%
-\def\fig{\multifig1}
-\def\doublefig{\multifig2}
-\def\triplefig{\multifig3}
-\def\multifig#1{\ifvmode\else\unskip\fi\@ifnextchar[{\@fig#1}{\@fig#1[htbp]}}
-%
-\def\@vtick{\vrule depth6pt width.2pt}
-\def\@htick{\vrule height.2pt width6pt}
-\def\@figbox#1{\setbox0=\psfig{figure=\picpath #1}\dimen0=\wd0
- \ifproofing
- \vbox{\offinterlineskip
- \hbox to \dimen0{\@htick\hfil\@htick}\kern -.4pt
- \hbox to \dimen0{\@vtick\hfil\@vtick}\kern -6pt
- \box0
- \kern -6pt\hbox to \dimen0{\@vtick\hfil\@vtick}%
- \kern -.4pt\hbox to \dimen0{\@htick\hfil\@htick}}%
- \else\box0\fi}
-
-%
-% #1 = number of parts #2 = placement #3 = filename(=label) #4 = title
-% #5 = caption
-%
-
-\def\@fig#1[#2]{%
- \def\@tempb{\@@fig{#1}[#2]}%
- \def\@tempa{\egroup\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\thea@label}}%
- \bgroup\@sanitize\afterassignment\@tempa\gdef\thea@label}
-
-\def\@@fig#1[#2]#3#4#5{%
- \begin{Figure}[#2]{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- {\hyperactivelabels
- \centerline{\ifnum#1=1 \@figbox{#3}\else\valign{\vfil##\vfil\cr
- \@figbox{#3-1}\cr \noalign{\hfil}\@figbox{#3-2}\cr
- \ifnum#1>2 \noalign{\hfil}\@figbox{#3-3}\cr\fi}\fi}}%
- \end{Figure}%
-}
-
-%
-\let\hyperactivelabels\relax % redefine as appropriate
-%
-
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par
- \def\@tempa{\addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}}
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}}
- \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb\ignorespaces #2}\begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \normalsize
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{%
- \setlanguage\language % put in a whatsit so that later \unhbox
- % will know what language it is
- \ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
-
-\newskip\captionskip
-\captionskip=10pt
-%
-% Redefined from book.sty.
-%
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\captionskip
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
- \ifproofing\@ifundefined{the@label}{}
- {\hbox to 0pt{\vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox{\tiny\the@label}\bigskip}\hss}}\fi
- \small\sf{\bf #1. }\ignorespaces #2}%
- \@captionwidth=\hsize \advance\@captionwidth-2\@captionmargin
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\@captionwidth {%
- \rightskip=\@captionmargin\leftskip=\@captionmargin
- \unhbox\@tempboxa\par}%
- \else
- \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi}
-
-% $Log: geomfig.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.10 95/07/20 13:42:16 levy
-%\captionskip
-%
-%Revision 1.9 1994/08/12 17:35:53 levy
-%allows empty title in figure (ie. \fig{filename}{}{foo})
-%> allows _ ^ \ & # $ % ~ in file names
-%
-%Revision 1.8 93/09/16 22:14:30 levy
-%language whatsit in caption
-%
-%Revision 1.7 92/07/17 13:44:23 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/06/25 22:31:08 levy
-%tables
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/06/18 16:55:16 levy
-%caption width error
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/06/10 12:42:10 levy
-%geompsfig -> geompsfi
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/05/27 02:08:42 levy
-%moved \hyperactivelabels to before figure (instead of caption!)
-%
-%Revision 1.2 1992/04/07 09:43:26 levy
-%commented out log line
-%
-% Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:00 levy
-% Initial revision
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfnt.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfnt.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e64a52bffc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomfnt.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /usr/home/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geomfnt.sty,v 1.2 95/07/03 14:44:31 levy Exp Locker: levy $
-% NFSS2 mods 95/06/18 by J Rawnsley
-
-\ifx\fmtname\format@e
- \RequirePackage{amsfonts}
- \RequirePackage{amssymb}
-\else
- \input newlfont.sty
- \input amsfonts.sty
- \input amssymb.sty
-\fi
-
-\let\emptyset\varnothing
-\let\epsilon\varepsilon %to agree with figure labels; also looks better
-
-\def\hide@fi{\fi}
-\def\hide@else{\else}
-
-\ifx\DeclareMathAlphabet\@undefined
- \def\mathss{\protect\pmathss}
- \def\pmathss{\RIfM@\expandafter\mathss@\hide@else
- \expandafter\nonmatherr@\expandafter\mathss\hide@fi}
- \newmathalphabet*\mathss@{cmss}{m}{n}
- \def\mathtt{\protect\pmathtt}
- \def\pmathtt{\RIfM@\expandafter\mathtt@\hide@else
- \expandafter\nonmatherr@\expandafter\mathtt\hide@fi}
- \newmathalphabet*\mathtt@{cmtt}{m}{n}
-%
-% mods needed because of the Mittelbach-Schoepf font scheme
-%
-\def\bf{\ifmmode
- \@warning{\string\bf\space ignored in mathmode; use \string\mathbf{...}}%
- \else\protect\pbf\fi}
-\def\tt{\ifmmode
- \@warning{\string\tt\space ignored in mathmode; use \string\mathtt{...}}%
- \else\protect\ptt\fi}
-\def\rm{\ifmmode
- \@warning{\string\rm\space ignored in mathmode; use \string\mathrm{...}}%
- \else\protect\prm\fi}
-\def\it{\ifmmode
- \@warning{\string\it\space ignored in mathmode; use \string\mathit{...}}%
- \else\protect\pit\fi}
-\def\sf{\ifmmode
- \@warning{\string\sf\space ignored in mathmode; use \string\mathss{...}}%
- \else\protect\psf\fi}
- \let\mathbf\bold
-\else
- \DeclareMathAlphabet\mathss{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
- \DeclareMathAlphabet\mathtt{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \let\text\textrm
- \let\bold\mathbf
-\fi
-
-\let\sans\mathss
-\let\type\mathtt
-
-\def\${{\protect\pdollar}}
-\def\pdollar{\ifmmode\char`\$\else\text{\ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
- \sl \else \normalshape \fi\char`\$}\fi}
-
-%
-% mod routines from amstex.sty
-%
-\def\bmod{\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu\mathbin
- {\operator@font mod}\penalty900
- \mkern5mu\mskip-\medmuskip}
-\def\pmod#1{\allowbreak\ifinner\mkern8mu\else\mkern18mu\fi
- ({\operator@font mod}\,\,#1)}
-\def\pod#1{\allowbreak\ifinner\mkern8mu\else\mkern18mu\fi(#1)}
-\def\mod#1{\allowbreak\ifinner\mkern12mu
- \else\mkern18mu\fi{\operator@font mod}\,\,#1}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-%% Math extension font
-%% (from fontdef.ams)
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\ifx\DeclareMathAlphabet\@undefined
-\new@fontshape{cmex}{m}{n}{%
- <5>cmex7 at5pt%
- <6>cmex7 at6pt%
- <7>cmex7%
- <8>cmex8%
- <9>cmex9%
- <10>cmex10%
- <11>cmex10 at10.95pt%
- <12>cmex10 at12pt%
- <14>cmex10 at14.4pt%
- <17>cmex10 at17.28pt%
- <20>cmex10 at20.74pt%
- <25>cmex10 at24.88pt%
- }{}
-
-\extra@def{cmex}{}{}
-
-\define@mathgroup\mv@normal{3}{cmex}{m}{n}
-\define@mathgroup\mv@bold{3}{cmex}{b}{n}
-
-\new@mathgroup\cmss@group
-\define@mathgroup\mv@normal\cmss@group{cmss}{m}{n}
-\define@mathgroup\mv@bold\cmss@group{cmss}{b}{n}
-\else
- \catcode`\ =9
-\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{%
- <-8> cmex7%
- <8>cmex8%
- <9>cmex9%
- <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88>cmex10%
- }{}%
- \expandafter\let\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
- \catcode`\ =10
-
-\DeclareSymbolFont{cmss}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
-\fi
-
-%$Log: geomfnt.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.2 95/07/03 14:44:31 levy
-%NFSS2 changes by John Rawnsley
-%
-%Revision 1.2 95/07/03 14:31:45 levy
-%NFSS2 changes by John Rawnsley
-%
-%Revision 1.2 95/07/03 14:09:28 levy
-%NFSS2 changes by John Rawnsley
-%
-%Revision 1.2 95/07/03 14:08:08 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:45:07 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
-% Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:09:01 levy
-% Initial revision
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomindx.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomindx.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 368ba4a3dcc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geomindx.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /home/tampa_a/fac/levy/texts/geombook/RCS/index.sty,v 1.1 92/04/07 09:47:28 levy Exp $
-
-\@ifundefined{@margin}{}{\endinput}
-
-%
-% index and glossary macros
-%
-% the basic user-level command is \index, which, in proof mode
-% merely prints the entry on the left margin. To revert to
-% index-making behavior, type \makeindex.
-%
-
-\newif\ifmakingindex\makingindexfalse
-\def\makeindex{\if@filesw \newwrite\@indexfile
- \immediate\openout\@indexfile=\jobname.idx
- \makingindextrue\typeout{Writing index file \jobname.idx }\fi}
-
-\def\index#1{\@bsphack\ifproofing\marginindex{#1}\fi\ifmakingindex\begingroup
- \set@key{#1}\@wrindex{\the\@key}\else\@esphack\fi}
-\def\marginindex#1{{\everypar{}\insert\@margin{%
- \vbox{\marginstyle\strut #1\hfil\strut}}}}
-\def\marginstyle{\tiny \hsize=1in \parindent=0pt \hangindent=10pt
- \hangafter=1 \rightskip=0pt plus 5em }
-\newinsert\@margin \dimen\@margin=\maxdimen \count\@margin=0 \skip\@margin=0pt
-
-%
-% change in output routine to account for new insertion class
-%
-\def\@makecol{\ifvoid\footins \setbox\@outputbox\box\@cclv
- \else\setbox\@outputbox
- \vbox{\boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
- \unvbox\@cclv\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule\unvbox\footins}\fi
- \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}\gdef\@midlist{}\@combinefloats
- \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\@colht{\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth
- \@texttop\dimen128=\dp\@outputbox
- \ifvoid\@margin\else
- \llap{\vbox to0pt {\kern4pt\box\@margin \vss}\kern .1in}\fi
- \unvbox\@outputbox
- \vskip-\dimen128\@textbottom}
- \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth}
-
-%
-% But \index does not print its argument. To index a word that
-% actually appears in the text say \ix{...}. To index notation say \ixn$...$
-% or \ixninv$...$, depending on whether the word should appear or not.
-% And just for symmetry, you can also use \ixinv, which equals \index:
-%
-% Text Notation
-%
-% Visible \ix \ixn
-% Invisible \ixinv \ixninv
-%
-\def\ixinv{\index} % must not use \let, since meaning changes
- % under \makeindex
-\def\ix#1{#1\index{#1}}
-\def\ixninv$#1${\index{$#1$}}
-\def\ixn$#1${$#1$\index{$#1$}}
-
-%
-% Some functions such as cross-referencing automatically invoke
-% indexing. The particular format is defined here.
-% The xfs for \labelindex are needed because \index doesn't expand
-%
-\def\labelindex#1{\@xf\@xf\@xf\index
- \@xf\@xf\@xf{\@xf\cap@first\object@type\space``#1''}}
-\def\refindex#1{\index{#1}}
-{\catcode`\%=12 \gdef\refinvindex#1{\index{% #1}}}
-
-% $Log: index.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.1 92/04/07 09:47:28 levy
-%Initial revision
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geompsfi.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geompsfi.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index d158531e711..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/geomsty/geompsfi.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,632 +0,0 @@
-% $Header: /usr/home/levy/texts/geomsty/RCS/geompsfi.sty,v 1.18 95/12/06 13:40:51 levy Exp $
-
-% This is geompsfig.sty, based on psfig.tex by Trevor Darrell (as
-% modified by Stefan Bechtoslheim).
-%
-% It works with Latex and plain TeX (normally under the name geompsfi.tex).
-% Thanks to Ket Richter for working out the changes for Plain tex.
-
-% Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993 Silvio Levy
-
-% This file is part of the Geom Latex style files. It is distributed in
-% the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. The author
-% makes no representation as to its suitability for any purpose.
-
-% Permission is granted for use and non-profit distribution of this
-% file provided that this notice is clearly maintained. The right to
-% distribute this file for profit or as part of any commercial
-% product is specifically reserved for the author. If you make
-% changes to this file you cannot distribute it under the same name,
-% but you can distribute it under a different name provided it is not
-% for profit of as part of a commercial product, and provided that the
-% copyright line above and this notice are clearly maintained.
-
-% This version assumes that dimensions read from a PostScript file or
-% from a .lab file are in bp (big points). Dimensions found in the
-% source TeX file (as in \psfig{...,height=2in}) are true dimensions
-% (that is, are not scaled pt -> bp). This is all as it should be.
-
-\edef\atcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\catcode`@=11
-
-\newif\ifoldlabels \oldlabelsfalse
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @ifundefined\endcsname\relax
-\long\def\@ifundefined#1#2#3{\expandafter\ifx\csname
- #1\endcsname\relax#2\else#3\fi}
-\def\@iden#1{#1}
-%\newdimen\@tempdima
-\alloc@1\dimen\dimendef\insc@unt\@tempdima
-\def\@warning#1{\message{Warning: #1.}}
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{ps@init}{}{\endinput}
-
-\@ifundefined{hyperactivelabels}{\let\hyperactivelabels\relax}{}
-
-\newif\if@topspecials %false for Rokicki's dvips: \special is at bottom of box
- % true for dvitps, dvi2ps
-
-\input driver.chg % driver-dependent definitions (generally a symlink)
-
-\newcount\psfc@a
-\newcount\psfc@b
-\newcount\psfc@c
-\newcount\psfc@d
-\newcount\psfc@e
-\newcount\psfc@f
-\newcount\psfc@g
-\newcount\psfc@h
-\newcount\psfc@i
-\newcount\psfc@j
-\newcount\psscale@count
-\newtoks\psfigtoks@
-% A dimension register for temporarily storing a dimension in
-% \@pDimenToSpNumber.
-\newdimen\psfig@dimen
-%
-%\newwrite\@unused
-%\def\typeout#1{{\let\protect\string\immediate\write\@unused{#1}}}
-
-% Identifying message is here.
-% \typeout{psfig/tex 1.4.gcg / TeXPS}\fi
-%
-% @psdo control structure -- similar to Latex @for.
-% I redefined these with different names so that psfig can
-% be used with TeX as well as LaTeX, and so that it will not
-% be vunerable to future changes in LaTeX's internal
-% control structure.
-\def\@nnil{\@nil}
-\def\@empty{}
-\def\@psdonoop#1\@@#2#3{}
-\def\@psdo#1:=#2\do#3{\edef\@psdotmp{#2}\ifx\@psdotmp\@empty \else
- \expandafter\@psdoloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
-\def\@psdoloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else
- #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@ipsdoloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}
-\def\@ipsdoloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \let\@nextwhile=\@psdonoop \else
- #4\relax\let\@nextwhile=\@ipsdoloop\fi\@nextwhile#2\@@#3{#4}}
-\def\@tpsdo#1:=#2\do#3{\xdef\@psdotmp{#2}\ifx\@psdotmp\@empty \else
- \@tpsdoloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
-\def\@tpsdoloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \let\@nextwhile=\@psdonoop \else
- #4\relax\let\@nextwhile=\@tpsdoloop\fi\@nextwhile#2\@@#3{#4}}
-%
-\def\psdraft{%
- \def\@psdraft{0}
- %\typeout{draft level now is \@psdraft \space.}
-}
-\def\psfull{%
- \def\@psdraft{100}
- %\typeout{draft level now is \@psdraft \space.}
-}
-\psfull
-\newif\if@prologfile
-\newif\if@postlogfile
-\newif\if@noisy
-\def\pssilent{%
- \@noisyfalse
-}
-\def\psnoisy{%
- \@noisytrue
-}
-%\psnoisy
-\pssilent
-% These are for the option list:
-% a specification of the form a = b maps to calling \@p@@sa{b}.
-\newif\if@bbllx
-\newif\if@bblly
-\newif\if@bburx
-\newif\if@bbury
-\newif\if@height
-\newif\if@width
-\newif\if@rheight
-\newif\if@rwidth
-\newif\if@clip
-\newif\if@proportional
-\newif\if@scale
-\newif\if@verbose
-\def\@p@@sclip#1{\@cliptrue}
-\def\@p@@sproportional#1{\@proportionaltrue}
-\def\@p@@sfile#1{%
- %\typeout{file is #1}
- \def\@p@sfile{#1.ps}%
- \def\@labfile{#1.lab}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sfigure#1{%
- \def\@p@sfile{#1.ps}%
- \def\@labfile{#1.lab}%
-}
-% \@pDimenToSpNumber
-% ==================
-% Convert a dimension into scaled points.
-% #1: the name of macro which will expand to the dimension in
-% scaled points, without the unit 'sp' though, i.e. as a pure
-% integer.
-% #2: the dimension (not a dimension register, use
-% \the if dimension is stored in a dimension register).
-\def\@pDimenToSpNumber #1#2{%
- \psfig@dimen = #2\relax
- \edef#1{\number\psfig@dimen}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sbbllx#1{%
- %\typeout{bbllx is #1}
- \@bbllxtrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbbllx}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sbblly#1{%
- %\typeout{bblly is #1}
- \@bbllytrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbblly}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sbburx#1{%
- %\typeout{bburx is #1}
- \@bburxtrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbburx}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sbbury#1{%
- %\typeout{bbury is #1}
- \@bburytrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbbury}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@sheight#1{%
- \@heighttrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sheight}{#1}%
- %\typeout{Height is \@p@sheight}
-}
-\def\@p@@swidth#1{%
- %\typeout{Width is #1}
- \@widthtrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@swidth}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@srheight#1{%
- %\typeout{Reserved height is #1}
- \@rheighttrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@srheight}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@srwidth#1{%
- %\typeout{Reserved width is #1}
- \@rwidthtrue
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@srwidth}{#1}%
-}
-\def\@p@@ssilent#1{%
- \@verbosefalse
-}
-\def\@p@@sscale #1{%
- \def\@p@scale{#1}%
- \@scaletrue
-}
-
-\def\@p@@sprolog#1{\@prologfiletrue\def\@prologfileval{#1}}
-\def\@p@@spostlog#1{\@postlogfiletrue\def\@postlogfileval{#1}}
-\def\@cs@name#1{\csname #1\endcsname}
-\def\@setparms#1=#2,{\def\@tempa{#2}\ifx\@tempa\@empty
- \@warning{bad syntax (missing = or extra comma) in argument of \string\psfig}%
- \else\@@setparms#1=#2,\fi}
-\def\@@setparms#1=#2=,{\@cs@name{@p@@s#1}{#2}}
-%
-% Initialize the defaults.
-%
-\def\ps@init@parms{%
- \@bbllxfalse \@bbllyfalse
- \@bburxfalse \@bburyfalse
- \@heightfalse \@widthfalse
- \@rheightfalse \@rwidthfalse
- \@scalefalse
- \def\@p@sbbllx{}\def\@p@sbblly{}%
- \def\@p@sbburx{}\def\@p@sbbury{}%
- \def\@p@sheight{}\def\@p@swidth{}%
- \def\@p@srheight{}\def\@p@srwidth{}%
- \def\@p@sfile{}%
- \def\@labfile{}%
- \def\@p@scost{10}%
- \def\@sc{}%
- \@prologfiletrue
- \@postlogfilefalse
- \@clipfalse
- \@proportionalfalse
- \if@noisy
- \@verbosetrue
- \else
- \@verbosefalse
- \fi
-}
-%
-% Go through the options setting things up.
-%
-\def\parse@ps@parms#1{%
- \@psdo\@psfiga:=#1\do
- {\expandafter\@setparms\@psfiga=,}%
-}
-
-\newif\ifno@file
-\newif\ifno@bb
-\newif\ifnot@eof
-\newif\if@bbmatch
-\newif\if@crematch
-\newif\ifmathematica
-\newif\ifillustrator
-\newread\ps@stream
-\newread\lab@stream
-\newcount\@linecount
-\newcount\maxheaderlines
-\maxheaderlines=100
-
-%
-% Scan header of file, looking for ``BoundingBox'' and ``Creator'' lines
-%
-\def\scan@header{%
- \openin\ps@stream=\@p@sfile
- \openin\lab@stream=\@labfile
- \ifeof\ps@stream
- \relax %needed so the \@warning won't cause trouble
- \@warning{cannot open \@p@sfile}
- \no@filetrue
- \else
- \not@eoftrue
- \ifno@bb \@bbmatchfalse \else \@bbmatchtrue \fi
- \@crematchfalse
- \catcode`\%=12
- \catcode`\:=12 % in case punctuation is active (e.g., under french.sty)
- \@linecount=\maxheaderlines
- \loop
- \read\ps@stream to \line@in
- \global\psfigtoks@=\expandafter{\line@in}
- \ifeof\ps@stream \not@eoffalse \fi
- %\typeout{ looking at :: \the\psfigtoks@ }
- \if@bbmatch \else \@bbtest{\psfigtoks@} \fi
- \if@crematch \else \@cretest{\psfigtoks@} \fi
- \if@crematch \if@bbmatch \not@eoffalse \fi \fi
- \advance\@linecount-1
- \ifnum\@linecount=0 \not@eoffalse \fi
- \ifnot@eof \repeat
- \fi
- \catcode`\%=14
-}
-
-% '% ' becomes a regular character for a very short time.
-{
- \catcode`\%=12
- \catcode`\:=12
- \gdef\@bbtest#1{\expandafter\@bb@\the#1%%BoundingBox:\@bbtest\@bb@}
- \global\long\def\@bb@#1%%BoundingBox:#2#3\@bb@{\ifx\@bbtest#2
- \else\@bbmatchtrue\expandafter\bb@cull\the\psfigtoks@\fi}
-
- \gdef\@cretest#1{\expandafter\@cre@\the#1%%Creator:\@cretest\@cre@}
- \global\long\def\@cre@#1%%Creator:#2#3\@cre@{\ifx\@cretest#2
- \else\@crematchtrue\@mathtest{\psfigtoks@}\@illtest{\psfigtoks@}\fi}
-}
-
-%
-% Takes action if ``Creator'' line contains ``Mathematica'' or ``Illustrator''
-%
-\def\@mathtest#1{\expandafter\@math@\the#1Mathematica\@mathtest\@math@}
-\long\def\@math@#1Mathematica#2#3\@math@{\ifx\@mathtest#2
- \else\mathematicatrue \fi}
-
-\def\@illtest#1{\expandafter\@ill@\the#1Illustrator\@illtest\@ill@}
-\long\def\@ill@#1Illustrator#2#3\@ill@{\ifx\@illtest#2
- \else\illustratortrue \fi}
-
-\def\bb@cull#1:{\expandafter\bb@@cull\@iden}
-\long\def\bb@@cull#1 #2 #3 #4 {%
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbbllx}{#1bp}%
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbblly}{#2bp}%
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbburx}{#3bp}%
- \@pDimenToSpNumber{\@p@sbbury}{#4bp}%
- \no@bbfalse
-}
-
-% Compute \@bbw and \@bbh, the width and height of the
-% bounding box.
-\def\compute@bb{%
- \no@bbfalse
- \if@bbllx \else \no@bbtrue \fi
- \if@bblly \else \no@bbtrue \fi
- \if@bburx \else \no@bbtrue \fi
- \if@bbury \else \no@bbtrue \fi
- \scan@header
- \ifno@file
- \else
- \ifno@bb
- \@warning{no bounding box found in \@p@sfile}
- \no@filetrue
- \else
- % Now compute the size of the bounding box.
- \psfc@c=\@p@sbburx
- \psfc@b=\@p@sbbury
- \advance\psfc@c by -\@p@sbbllx
- \advance\psfc@b by -\@p@sbblly
- \edef\@bbw{\number\psfc@c}
- \edef\@bbh{\number\psfc@b}
- %\typeout{\string\compute@bb: bbh = \@bbh, bbw = \@bbw}
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-
-%
-% \in@hundreds performs #1 * (#2 / #3) correct to the hundreds,
-% then leaves the result in \@result.
-%
-% note: #3 should be a big number, or a multiple of 10.
-%
-\def\in@hundreds #1#2#3{%
- \psfc@g=#2
- \psfc@d=#3
- \divide\psfc@d 10
- \psfc@a=\psfc@g % First two digits #2/#3.
- \divide\psfc@a by \psfc@d
- \psfc@f=\psfc@a
- \multiply\psfc@f by \psfc@d
- \advance\psfc@g by -\psfc@f
- \multiply\psfc@g by 10
- \psfc@f=\psfc@g % Third digit of #2/#3.
- \divide\psfc@f by \psfc@d
- \psfc@j=\psfc@f
- \multiply\psfc@j by \psfc@d
- \advance\psfc@g by -\psfc@j
- \multiply\psfc@g by 10
- \psfc@j=\psfc@g % Third digit.
- \divide\psfc@j by \psfc@d
- \psfc@h=#1\psfc@i=0
- \psfc@e=\psfc@h
- \multiply\psfc@e by \psfc@a
- \advance\psfc@i by \psfc@e
- \psfc@e=\psfc@h
- \divide\psfc@e by 10
- \multiply\psfc@e by \psfc@f
- \advance\psfc@i by \psfc@e
- %
- \psfc@e=\psfc@h
- \divide\psfc@e by 100
- \multiply\psfc@e by \psfc@j
- \advance\psfc@i by \psfc@e
- \divide\psfc@i 10
- %
- \edef\@result{\number\psfc@i}
-}
-% Scale a value #1 by the current scaling factor and reassign the new
-% scaled value.
-\def\@ScaleInHundreds #1{%
- \in@hundreds{#1}{\@p@scale}{100}%
- \edef#1{\@result}%
-}
-%
-%
-% Compute width from height.
-\def\compute@wfromh{%
- % computing : width = height * (bbw / bbh)
- \in@hundreds{\@p@sheight}{\@bbw}{\@bbh}%
- %\typeout{ \@p@sheight * \@bbw / \@bbh, = \@result }
- \edef\@p@swidth{\@result}%
- %\typeout{w from h: width is \@p@swidth}%
-}
-%
-% Compute height from width.
-%
-\def\compute@hfromw{%
- % computing : height = width * (bbh / bbw)
- \in@hundreds{\@p@swidth}{\@bbh}{\@bbw}%
- %\typeout{ \@p@swidth * \@bbh / \@bbw = \@result }
- \edef\@p@sheight{\@result}%
- %\typeout{h from w : height is \@p@sheight}%
-}
-%
-% Compute height and width when both are given and proportionality
-% must be preserved.
-%
-\def\compute@minhw{%
- \in@hundreds{\@p@swidth}{\@bbh}{\@bbw}%
- \ifnum\@p@sheight<\@result
- \in@hundreds{\@p@sheight}{\@bbw}{\@bbh}%
- \edef\@p@swidth{\@result}%
- \else
- \edef\@p@sheight{\@result}%
- \fi
-}
-%
-% Compute height and width, i.e. \@p@sheight and \@p@swidth.
-%
-\def\compute@handw{%
- % If height is given.
- \if@height
- % If width is given
- \if@width
- \if@proportional
- \compute@minhw
- \fi
- \else
- % Height, no width: compute width.
- \compute@wfromh
- \fi
- \else
- % No height.
- \if@width
- % Width is given, no height though: compute it.
- \compute@hfromw
- \else
- % Neither width no height is give.
- \edef\@p@sheight{\@bbh}
- \edef\@p@swidth{\@bbw}
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% Compute the amount of space to reserve. Unless defined
-% using rheight and rwidth when \psfig is called, these values
-% default to \@p@sheight and \@p@swidth.
-\def\compute@resv{%
- \if@rheight \else \edef\@p@srheight{\@p@sheight} \fi
- \if@rwidth \else \edef\@p@srwidth{\@p@swidth} \fi
-}
-%
-%
-% \psfig
-% ======
-% usage: \psfig{file=, height=, width=, bbllx=, bblly=, bburx=, bbury=,
-% rheight=, rwidth=, clip=, scale=, proportional=}
-%
-% "clip=" and "proportional=" are switches and take no value,
-% but the `=' must be present.
-%
-\def\partest{\par}
-\def\psfig#1{%
- \vbox {%
- \offinterlineskip
- \ps@init@parms
- \parse@ps@parms{#1}%
- % Compute any missing sizes.
- \compute@bb
- \ifno@file\vbox{\hbox{{\tt\@p@sfile} not found}}%
- \else
- \compute@handw
- \compute@resv
- \if@scale
- %\if@verbose \typeout{psfig: scaling by \@p@scale}\fi
- % We now scale the width and height as reported to the PS printer.
- \@ScaleInHundreds{\@p@swidth}%
- \@ScaleInHundreds{\@p@sheight}%
- \@ScaleInHundreds{\@p@srwidth}%
- \@ScaleInHundreds{\@p@srheight}%
- \fi
- %
- \ifnum\@p@scost<\@psdraft
- %\if@verbose \typeout{psfig: including \@p@sfile \space}\fi
- \if@topspecials\do@specials\fi
- % Create a vbox to reserve the proper amount of space for the figure.
- \vbox to \@p@srheight sp{%
- \hbox to \@p@srwidth sp{}%
- \vss
- }%
- \if@topspecials\else\do@specials\fi
- \ifeof\lab@stream
- %\if@verbose\typeout{psfig: no file \@labfile \space found}\fi
- \else{%
- \hyperactivelabels
- \not@eoftrue
- \loop
- \read\lab@stream to \line@in \ifx\line@in\partest\else\line@in\fi
- \ifeof\lab@stream \not@eoffalse \fi
- \ifnot@eof \repeat
- }\fi
- \else
- % Draft mode: reserve the space for the figure and print the path name.
- \vbox to \@p@srheight sp{%
- \hbox to \@p@srwidth sp{%
- \if@verbose
- \@p@sfile
- \fi
- }%
- \vss
- }%
- \fi
- \fi
- }%
-}
-
-\def\do@specials{\ps@init\ps@begin
- \if@clip
- %\if@verbose \typeout{(clip)} \fi
- \ps@clip \fi
- \if@prologfile \ps@prolog \fi \ps@include \if@postlogfile \ps@postlog \fi
- \ps@end}
-
-\newbox\label@box
-\newdimen\x@lab \newdimen\y@lab
-\newdimen\x@aux \newdimen\y@aux
-\newdimen\hair\hair=3pt
-\def\setlabel#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setbox\label@box\hbox{$#1$}%
- \x@lab.5\wd\label@box \x@lab#4\x@lab
- \y@lab.5\ht\label@box\advance\y@lab.5\dp\label@box \y@lab#5\y@lab
-% rotate lab clockwise by 22.5 degrees to get aux
- \x@aux.92388\x@lab \advance\x@aux.38268\y@lab
- \y@aux-.38268\x@lab \advance\y@aux.92388\y@lab
-% choose
- \ifdim\x@aux>0pt
- \ifdim\y@aux>0pt
- \ifdim\x@aux>\y@aux\advance\x@lab.7071\hair\advance\y@lab.7071\hair
- \else\advance\y@lab\hair\fi
- \else
- \ifdim\x@aux>-\y@aux\advance\x@lab\hair
- \else\advance\x@lab.7071\hair\advance\y@lab-.7071\hair\fi
- \fi
- \else
- \ifdim\y@aux>0pt
- \ifdim\x@aux>-\y@aux\advance\x@lab-.7071\hair\advance\y@lab.7071\hair
- \else\advance\x@lab-\hair\fi
- \else
- \ifdim\x@aux>\y@aux\advance\y@lab-\hair
- \else
- \ifdim\x@aux<0pt
- \advance\x@lab-.7071\hair\advance\y@lab-.7071\hair\fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \advance\x@lab.5\wd\label@box
- \advance\y@lab.5\ht\label@box\advance\y@lab.5\dp\label@box
- \x@aux=#2bp \ifoldlabels \else \advance\x@aux by -\@p@sbbllx sp \fi
- \y@aux=#3bp \ifoldlabels \else \advance\y@aux by -\@p@sbblly sp \fi
- \in@hundreds{\x@aux}{\@p@swidth}{\@bbw}
- \edef\@xpos{\@result}
- \in@hundreds{\y@aux}{\@p@sheight}{\@bbh}
- \edef\@ypos{\@result}
- \vbox to 0pt{%
- \vss\hbox to\@p@srwidth sp{\hskip \@xpos sp \hskip-\x@lab
- \box\label@box\hss}\vskip \@ypos sp \vskip-\y@lab}}
-
-\catcode`@=\atcatcode
-
-% $Log: geompsfi.sty,v $
-%Revision 1.18 95/12/06 13:40:51 levy
-%made geompsfi.tex work (\ifx\@ifundefined was wrong!)
-%
-%Revision 1.17 1994/06/23 04:36:58 levy
-%added \ifoldlabels for compatibility with behavior before version 1.11
-%
-%Revision 1.16 1994/04/29 00:19:21 levy
-%combined with geompsfi.tex
-%
-%Revision 1.16 1994/04/29 00:03:40 levy
-%leave plenty of space so patch geompsfi.tex works
-%
-%Revision 1.15 1994/04/03 07:07:57 levy
-%removed hair correction when x@lab and y@lab are both zero
-%
-%Revision 1.14 1993/09/16 22:22:38 levy
-%\catcode`\:=12 % in case punctuation is active (e.g., under french.sty)
-%
-%Revision 1.13 1993/08/27 23:04:27 levy
-%removed "true" from PS dimensions (so it works with \magnifications)
-%
-%Revision 1.12 93/08/16 12:28:46 levy
-%\ifundefined\hyperactivelabels
-%
-%Revision 1.11 93/07/19 02:17:24 levy
-%.lab coordinates should be world coordinates
-%
-%Revision 1.10 93/03/05 10:59:38 levy
-%error message when arguments of \psfig are incorrect
-%
-%Revision 1.9 1993/01/13 15:50:36 levy
-%expressed things in bp (correctly)
-%
-%Revision 1.8 1993/01/10 20:56:04 levy
-%inhundreds -> inthousands
-%
-%Revision 1.6 92/07/13 11:12:40 levy
-%better error message when bounding box not found
-%
-%Revision 1.5 92/06/15 22:05:22 levy
-%proportional scaling
-%
-%Revision 1.4 92/06/10 13:03:45 levy
-%extend header from 10 to 15 lines
-%
-%Revision 1.3 92/06/10 12:41:14 levy
-%scan header for "Creator" line
-%
-%Revision 1.2 92/04/07 09:09:17 levy
-%*** empty log message ***
-%
-% Revision 1.1 92/03/31 14:12:38 levy
-% Initial revision
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
index ee316fe203f..874a95ab146 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
@@ -214,6 +214,7 @@ chdir $startdir || die "chdir($startdir) failed: $!"; # back to raw
'garuda-c90', "&MAKEgaruda_c90",
'gene', "die 'skipping, complicated, some have sources, sorry'",
'genmisc', "die 'too complicated, sorry'",
+ 'geomsty', "die 'skipping, nonfree license'",
'germbib', "&MAKEgermbib",
'gfsartemisia',"&MAKEflatten",
'gfsbaskerville',"&MAKEflatten",
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
index f2594170cf5..09dfcd568f5 100644
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-latexextra.tlpsrc
@@ -213,7 +213,6 @@ depend gauss
depend gcard
depend gcite
depend genmpage
-depend geomsty
depend ginpenc
depend gloss
depend glossaries
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/geomsty.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/geomsty.tlpsrc
deleted file mode 100644
index d95f2dab0dd..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/geomsty.tlpsrc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-name geomsty
-category Package